Harmonic MCT. Software Guide VERSION X. Mass Configuration Tool NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G. Rev B

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "Harmonic MCT. Software Guide VERSION X. Mass Configuration Tool NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G. Rev B"

Transcription

1 Harmonic MCT Mass Configuration Tool Software Guide VERSION X NSG 8108, 9116, NSG9000-3G, 6G & 40G Rev B

2 Disclaimer Harmonic reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty. The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature, and does not constitute a binding offer for sale of the product described herein. Harmonic assumes no responsibility or liability arising from the use of the products described herein, except as expressly agreed to in writing by Harmonic. The use and purchase of this product do not convey a license under any patent rights, copyrights, trademark rights, or any intellectual property rights of Harmonic. Nothing hereunder constitutes a representation or warranty that using any products in the manner described herein will not infringe any patents of third parties. Trademark Acknowledgments Harmonic and all Harmonic product names are trademarks of Harmonic Inc. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved.

3 Documentation Conventions This manual uses some special symbols and fonts to call your attention to important information. The following symbols appear throughout this manual: DANGER: The Danger symbol calls your attention to information that, if ignored, can cause physical harm to you. CAUTION: The Caution symbol calls your attention to information that, if ignored, can adversely affect the performance of your Harmonic product, or that can make a procedure needlessly difficult. LASER DANGER: The Laser symbol and the Danger alert call your attention to information about the lasers in this product that, if ignored, can cause physical harm to you. NOTE: The Note symbol calls your attention to additional information that you will benefit from heeding. It may be used to call attention to an especially important piece of information you need, or it may provide additional information that applies in only some carefully delineated circumstances. TIP: The Tip symbol calls your attention to parenthetical information that is not necessary for performing a given procedure, but which, if followed, might make the procedure or its subsequent steps easier, smoother, or more efficient. In addition to these symbols, this manual uses the following text conventions: Data Entry: indicates text you enter at the keyboard. User Interface: indicates a button to click, a menu item to select, or a key or key sequence to press. Screen Output: shows console output or other text that is displayed to you on a computer screen. Bold: indicates the definition of a new term. Italics: used for emphasis, cross-references, and hyperlinked cross-references in online documents Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved.

4 Table of Contents Table of Contents Chapter 1 Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction 1.1 Overview MCT Installation System Requirements Installing MCT Integrating MCT in a Firewalled Network Starting MCT and Logging In Changing MCT Password Reverting to the Default Password Migrating to a Higher MCT Version Chapter 2 MCT User Interface 2.1 Getting to Know the MCT UI MCT Button MCT Options Device Timeout Quick Access Tool Bar MCT Title Bar MCT Tabs MCT Ribbon MCT Navigation Pane Device Information Section Details Section Getting to Know the Clipboard Tools Selecting Multiple Rows Selecting Multiple Cells Copying and Pasting Cells Chapter 3 MCT Basics 3.1 Managing MCT Database MCT Database Files Creating a New Database File Backing Up MCT Databases Working with Previous MCT Databases Managing Sites Tree view of Sites and NSGs Adding, Renaming and Deleting a Site Viewing a Site and devices - Using Filters Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group) Understanding the Editor Group Adding a Device Adding a Range of NSGs with Default Values Adding a Single Device with Cloned Values Harmonic Inc. 1 MCT Version x, Rev B

5 Table of Contents Adding a Range of NSGs with Cloned Values Deleting an NSG Device Setting Device Eth1 IP Address and Information Supporting Various NSG Versions Customizing the List of Supported Versions of NSG Firmware Finding the s You Want Find Feature Getting to Know the MCT Actions Launching NSG Web Client Resetting NSGs Setting the Internal NSG Clock Changing NSG Password Converting NSG 9000 to NSG G Converting NSG G to NSG G Action Status Dialog Downloading NSG Firmware Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG G Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG G Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG G MCT and NSGs Synchronization Comparing Configurations Synchronizing Configurations Sending Configuration to NSGs Exporting Information Exporting to NMX Exporting to SDV Session Manager of BigBand Exporting to SDV Session Manager of Cisco Exporting Device Uptime RF Module Redundancy Distributing Alarms Configuration to Multiple NSGs Creating Custom QAM Mapping File Importing Customized QAM Mapping Mode File Exporting Customized QAM Mapping Mode File Retrieving Licensing Information Understanding the Licensing Tab Authentication Tab Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) 4.1 Overview Setting NSG Platform s Configuring Input Ports Configuring the Input Ports of NSG Configuring the Input Ports of NSG Configuring the Input Ports of NSG & Below Configuring Operation Mode s PID Remapping Options UDP Port Scheme Harmonic Inc. 2 MCT Version x, Rev B

6 Table of Contents 4.5 Configuring Output s Configuring the TS Out in NSG 8108 and Configuring TS Out in NSG & Below Multicast (NSG 8108 and 9116) Routing a Socket (Sessions) - NSG & Below Defining NGOD s Configuring Network Routing s Configuring SNMP Managers and Community Configuring SNMP s for NSG 8108 and Configuring SNMP - NSG & Below Generating Access Control List (ACL) Conditional Access System (CAS) Configuring DVB CAS Privacy Mode Configuring PM Global s Configuring Privacy Mode s per NSG Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up 5.1 Overview Setting NSG Platform s Configuring Management Port Configuring the Input Ports of NSG x & Up RF Module Tab Configuring Redundancy s Configuring VOD s Configuring SDV Redundancy s Redundancy Configuring NSG 9000 and ISA SRM Communication Setting Device Time and Date Configuring TS Out in NSG x & Up Configuring Network Routing s Broadcast Application Defining a Passthrough Session Defining Service Remux Sessions Defining PID Remux Configuring M-CMTS Session Configuring NGOD s - NSG x & Up Configuring CAS s Configuring SNMP s Generating Access Control List (ACL) Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G 6.1 Overview Setting NSG Platform s Configuring Management Port Configuring the Input Ports of NSG G Configuring GbE Port Redundancy Harmonic Inc. 3 MCT Version x, Rev B

7 Table of Contents Input Forwarding Configuring/Viewing RF Module s QAM-RF Module Redundancy RF Module Redundancy RF Module Redundancy Overview Enabling the RF Module Redundancy Reverting Redundancy Module Configuring EdgeCluster s EdgeCluster Overview Enabling EdgeCluster Configuration Configuring EdgeCluster s Synchronizing Cluster Working with Devices in EdgeCluster EdgeCluster Maintenance Configuring VOD s Configuring SDV s Configuring ISA-Device Communication Defining Virtual ISA Devices Setting Device Time and Date Configuring TS Out s Configuring Network Routing s Configuring Broadcast s Defining Passthrough Sessions Defining Service Remux Sessions Defining PID Remux PID Range Sessions Configuring M-CMTS s Configuring NGOD s Configuring CAS s Selecting Encryption Mode Configuring PM s Configuring DVB CAS Configuring SNMP s Device Authentication Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G 7.1 Overview Setting NSG Platform s Configuring Management Port Configuring Ethernet Ports Configuring the Input Ports of NSG G Configuring GbE Port Redundancy Configuring/Viewing RF Module s Configuring/Viewing RF Ports s Configuring TS Out s Configuring the VOD Application Configuring SDV s Harmonic Inc. 4 MCT Version x, Rev B

8 Table of Contents 7.11 Configuring ISA-Device Communication Defining Virtual Devices Creating Virtual Management IPs Creating GbE Virtual IP Creating Virtual Devices Setting Device Time and Date Configuring Network Routing s Configuring Broadcast s Defining Service Remux Sessions Defining PID Remux Sessions Configuring M-CMTS s Configuring NGOD s Configuring CAS s Configuring PM s Configuring SNMP s Appendix A Standard ES Types and Descriptors A.1 Standard Elementary Stream (ES) Types A.2 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (MPEG) A.3 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (DVB) Appendix B EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps 2012 Harmonic Inc. 5 MCT Version x, Rev B

9 Chapter 1 Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction 1.1 Overview The Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) provides a method to rapidly configure a large number of Network Services Gateways (NSGs) through single application. With the MCT you can plan and record NSG configuration data offline, even before the NSGs are installed. Configuration details for each NSG are stored in an MCT database and downloaded to the NSGs over Ethernet. Use MCT for the following purposes: To make a template of the standard NSG configuration To download the set configuration to all the NSGs in your network To download NSG firmware to NSGs To migrate between MCT versions, see 1.4 Migrating to a Higher MCT Version on page MCT Installation The following items are shipped on the MCT CD: MCT setup files A PDF file of this user s guide and additional documentation System Requirements Table 1-1: Hardware and Software Requirements Component Component Details Minimum Requirements Processor Type Intel Core 2 duo or equivalent Frequency Processor Bus Speed 2.4GHz 533MHz RAM RAM 4GBytes Drives Hard Drive 40GBytes CD-ROM X52, Internal Video Adapter Interface PCI or AGP 2X Resolution 1280 x 768 Video Monitor Size 20" or larger Resolution 1024 x 768, 75Hz Ports Universal Serial Bus (USB) 2 ports, USB 1.0 or Harmonic Inc. 6 MCT Version x, Rev B

10 Chapter 1 Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction MCT Installation Table 1-1: Hardware and Software Requirements Component Component Details Minimum Requirements Network Adapter Operating System Microsoft.NET Framework One port, 10/100 Base-T The following options are supported: Windows 2003 Server 32-bit (English) Windows XP SP3 (English) Windows 2000 Workstation or Server (English) Microsoft.NET Framework version 2.0 NOTE: When using MCT as ERS proxy in a Privacy Mode enabled system, MCT should have connectivity to the NSG devices as well as the ERS (via the internet) NOTE: Harmonic strongly recommends not to install any additional software application(s) with the exception of NMX, on the MCT PC. Although no inter-operability issues are known, Harmonic can not guarantee correct operation of the MCT on a PC with other applications Installing MCT 1. Close all running applications on the computer. 2. Insert the MCT software CD into the CD drive. An installation menu opens listing the items you can install. 3. From the installation menu, select MCT Setup. 4. Follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation and reboot the computer when the installation completes. By default, the application is installed in the following location: MCT - C:\Program Files\Harmonic\MCT\MCT 10.x. (x stands for a real number, per software version) The folder Harmonic\MCT is added to the Start menu of your computer The following shortcut is added to the desktop. NOTE: MCT 9.x.x and up unifies MCT and MCT PM into a single software package Harmonic Inc. 7 MCT Version x, Rev B

11 Chapter 1 Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction Starting MCT and Logging In Integrating MCT in a Firewalled Network To allow MCT to communicate with other devices in a firewalled network, open the ports listed in the following table. Make sure to adjust your firewall to work with the TCP ports: Table 1-2: Required Open Ports Port Comment Port 21 Port 80 Port 23 Port 443 Standard FTP port Standard HTTP port Standard Telnet port Standard HTTPs port Allows MCT to connect to the FTP server for firmware upgrade of NSG 9000, NSG 9116 and NSG 8108 devices Allows MCT to communicate with NSG devices and License Manager. Allows MCT to communicate with NSG devices using the Telnet protocol. For NSG G and NSG G devices: allows communication with HTTPs server Allows communication with Motorola ERS. 1.3 Starting MCT and Logging In To prevent unauthorized access to sensitive configuration data, MCT requires users to login using a specific user name and password. The default user name and password are predefined as configure and are case sensitive. The user name is fixed and may not be changed. To Start MCT and to Login 1. In your desktop, double click the MCT icon, Or Select Start > Programs > Harmonic > MCT> MCT 10.x.x The following dialog appears: 2. In Password, enter configure, the default password. 3. Click Ok. MCT opens and you can start configuring the NSGs. To configure, create or open a database. For details see, Opening a Database on page Harmonic Inc. 8 MCT Version x, Rev B

12 Chapter 1 Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction Starting MCT and Logging In Changing MCT Password NOTE: This feature is unsupported for NSG G. 1. Click MCT button. 2. The following screen appears: MCT Options 1. Click MCT Options. 2. Select the General tab. 3. Click Change MCT Configure Password Harmonic Inc. 9 MCT Version x, Rev B

13 Chapter 1 Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction Migrating to a Higher MCT Version The following dialog opens: 4. Enter the data for the current password, the new requested password and re-enter the new password for verification. 5. Click Change Reverting to the Default Password If for any reason you need to revert back to the default password, execute the following steps: 1. Start the MCT application In the MCT Login dialog, click Lost Password.: Click to get a temporary password A message box window opens with a unique Request Code. 2. Contact Harmonic Customer Support and submit the Request code. You will receive a temporary password from Harmonic Customer Support. NOTE: The password provided is valid for that day and expires at midnight. 3. Enter the temporary password given in the Reset Code box. You are asked if you really want to set the password to it s default. 4. Select Yes. A text box appears stating that a Password has been set to it s default setting. 5. Run MCT using its default password. 1.4 Migrating to a Higher MCT Version You can add NSGs organized in older databases to databases of higher MCT versions by importing the management IP addresses of the NSGs into your current MCT database. If the IP addresses are organized in sites, you may choose whether to import sites hierarchy as well, or only NSG IP addresses. Once the IP address is added, you need to configure the imported devices. To import NSGs from previous databases 2012 Harmonic Inc. 10 MCT Version x, Rev B

14 Chapter 1 Mass Configuration Tool (MCT) Introduction Migrating to a Higher MCT Version 1. To import NSGs into a specific site, select that site. Otherwise, select the root node of the tree view. 2. Click MCT button. 3. Select Import > Import NSG IPs. The Open MCT File dialog appears. 4. Browse to the required MCT database and click Open. If the IP addresses are organized in sites, you are asked whether to import the site tree as well. Click Yes to import the IP addresses with the site tree. Click No, to import the IP addresses without the site tree. The IP addresses of the NSGs included in the imported database appear under the specified site (if selected in step 1), or under a temporary site called Imported NSGs. 5. To arrange the imported NSGs, you can drag and drop in the required site. 6. Configure the newly added NSGs Harmonic Inc. 11 MCT Version x, Rev B

15 Chapter 2 MCT User Interface 2.1 Getting to Know the MCT UI The MCT User Interface is comprised of the following: MCT button - see MCT Button on page 13 Quick Access Tool Bar - see Quick Access Tool Bar on page 15 Title Bar - see MCT Title Bar on page 16 MCT Tabs bar - see MCT Tabs on page 16 Navigation pane - see MCT Navigation Pane on page 18 Device Information - see Device Information Section on page 19 Details - see Details Section on page 19 MCT button Quick Access toolbar MCT tabs Title bar MCT ribbon Device filters Tree view of database Details Find Tab or Column Device Information 2012 Harmonic Inc. 12 MCT Version x, Rev B

16 Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI MCT Button Click the MCT button to open, save, import, export and much more. The following table lists the options the MCT button offers: Table 2-1: MCT Button Menu New Open Import Save Save As Export MCT Options Exit allows to open a new database allows to open an existing database allows to import the management IPs of NSGs arranged in another database allows to save the database allows to save a copy of the database allows to export to the following: NMX, see SBSS template file USRM template file Device uptime allows to access general MCT properties, MCT defaults, supported versions and logs. allows to quit the MCT program MCT Options To access MCT Options, do the following: 1. Click MCT Button. The following dialog appears: Click MCT Options 2. Click MCT Options Harmonic Inc. 13 MCT Version x, Rev B

17 Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI The following dialog appears: 3. In the Navigation pane, select the required option. The following table lists the available option and its features: Table 2-2: Option General Versions Custom UDP Mapping Allows to set the following: Tree view, see Tree view of Sites and NSGs on page 26 EdgeCluster ribbon group, see Enabling EdgeCluster Configuration on page 144 MCT configure password, see Changing MCT Password on page 9. Device timeout, see Device Timeout on page 14. Allows to select the required version. See Customizing the List of Supported Versions of NSG Firmware on page 34. Allows to set custom UDP mapping files. See 3.12 Creating Custom QAM Mapping File on page Device Timeout MCT allows you to set the time for device timeout. If MCT tries to connect with a device and the indicated device timeout period of time has elapsed, MCT sends an error message. By default, the timeout is msec which is an optimized time for MCT device communication. CAUTION: Do not change device timeout, unless your network is very slow and communication between MCT and the devices is affected. To define device timeout 1. Click MCT Button. 2. Click MCT Options Harmonic Inc. 14 MCT Version x, Rev B

18 Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI The following dialog appears: NSG communication timeout 3. Focus on General Properties. 4. In NSG Communication Timeout (msec.), enter the required value in milli seconds Quick Access Tool Bar New Save Help Customize Quick Access bar The Quick Access Toolbar allows to open a new database and to save a database: Table 2-3: Quick Access Toolbar Buttons Allows to open a new database. Allows to save a database. Allows to access the online help. Allows to customize the location of the quick access bar and ribbon Harmonic Inc. 15 MCT Version x, Rev B

19 Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI MCT Title Bar MCT version Current user Full path of the current database The MCT Title bar includes the following information: Currently installed MCT version Logged in user Full path of the database MCT Tabs MCT is furnished with two tabs: Home - includes main MCT commands Privacy Mode - includes commands related to Motorola Privacy Mode (PM) real-time encryption Licensing - It includes commands to allow locating licensing records spread across different NSGs at different sites. This tab is available in NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG9000-6G filters only. Authentication - allows to enter username and password for RADIUS server (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service). This tab is available in NSG9000-6G filter only Harmonic Inc. 16 MCT Version x, Rev B

20 Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI MCT Ribbon The MCT Ribbon helps to quickly find the commands that you need. Commands are organized in logical groups, which are collected together under tabs. Currently MCT includes the following tabs: Table 2-4: MCT Tabs and Commands Tab Command Group Home Clipboard Allows to cut, copy and paste cells. See page 21. Editor Actions Firmware Installation Synchronization Distribute RF Module Redundancy EdgeCluster Allows to add site/device, delete site/device, add a range of devices, clone and clone a range. See page 29. Allows to launch device GUI, download firmware, reset device, set device clock and change a password. See page 37. Allows to download firmware. See page page 44. Allows to get from device, send to device and compare with device. See page 53. Allows to send the alarms configuration of a specific device to other devices. See page 60. Allows to enable and configure QAM-RF module redundancy. See 6.6 RF Module Redundancy on page 141. Allows to work in edgecluster mode. See 6.7 Configuring EdgeCluster s on page 144. Privacy Mode ECM Allows to update and purge ECMs. See page 104. Options Allows to define PM parameters. See page 105. ERS Communication Allows to define ERS and NSG communication parameters. See page 106. VODS Allows to define VODS parameters. See page 106. Licensing Licensing Allows to query Harmonic s database for licensing information. Authentication RADIUS Credentials Allows to enter username and password for RADIUS authentication. See page Minimizing the Ribbon 1. Click Customize Quick Access Toolbar. 2. In the menu that opens, click Minimize the Ribbon. The Ribbon disappears except for the tabs. 3. To use the Ribbon while it is minimized, click the tab you want to use Harmonic Inc. 17 MCT Version x, Rev B

21 Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI MCT Navigation Pane The Navigation pane includes the following sections: A tree view section - shows in a tree view, the currently open MCT database. Filters section - includes the following buttons to view a site via one of the following filters: NSG G - shows NSG G devices only NSG G - shows NSG G devices only NSG shows NSG 9000 devices only NSG shows NSG 8108 devices only NSG shows NSG 9116 devices only For further details, see 3.2 Managing Sites on page Removing the Navigation Pane To show/hide navigation pane: 1. In the navigation pane click Show/Hide button. The navigation pane is minimized to the side as the following picture shows: Minimized navigation pane 2. To show the navigation pane, hover your mouse over the minimized navigation pane and once the Show icon appears, click it to show the navigation pane. To enlarge the Tree View section 1. Hover your mouse pointer over this icon. 2. Once the mouse pointer changes into a double sided arrow, drag it down to enlarge the tree view section or up to down size it. Hover the mouse pointer over this icon 2012 Harmonic Inc. 18 MCT Version x, Rev B

22 Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI Device Information Section Click the title bar to select it This section displays the devices of the selected site. When selected, it enables options in the Ribbon that allow you to configure the devices. To select the Device Information section Click the Title bar of the Device Information section. The color of the title bar changes to orange. Use the Device Information section to select a device and to view/define the device information. See Setting Device Eth1 IP Address and Information on page Details Section The Details section includes the tabs relevant to the NSG according to the selected Baseline firmware version. Click the title bar to select it To select the Details section Click the Title bar of the Details section. The color of the title bar changes to orange Using the Details Section When working with the Details section, the buttons Back, Forward and Sort in the Editor group are enabled. The following table lists the buttons and explains their functionality: Table 2-5: Editor Section - Buttons Related to Details Section Back Button Returns to the last tab, previous row and column. You can go back up to 10 previous tabs Harmonic Inc. 19 MCT Version x, Rev B

23 Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the MCT UI Table 2-5: Editor Section - Buttons Related to Details Section Button Forward Once you click Back, Forward in enabled. It moves you forward to the previous tab prior to clicking Back. Find Allows to search the Details section. See page 35. Sort Arranges the virtual devices according to the virtual device index. In the Details sections there are linked parameters. These parameters link you to other tabs which provide information on the parameter. For example, in the Details section you are working with the RF tab. The Slot No. parameter is a linked parameter. RF Ports tab is selected Slot No. is a linked parameter. Once you click on the required linked slot, MCT displays the RF Module tab with the required slot record selected. RF Module tab is selected The record of Slot No. 2 is selected to display related slot information You can view information on the selected slot. To return to the RF tab, click Back in Editor group Harmonic Inc. 20 MCT Version x, Rev B

24 Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the Clipboard Tools 2.2 Getting to Know the Clipboard Tools The Editing tools are organized in the Clipboard group. To ease the NSG configuration using MCT, MCT is designed as an Excel sheet. As in Excel, pay attention to the following: Select All button - click this button to select all the grid Select All button Column Heading - indicates whether an attribute in the row is selected or whether the whole row is selected: Column Heading - attribute is selected Column Heading - the whole row is selected For additional icons that may appear in the Row heading, see Reading Action Status Icons on page Selecting Multiple Rows You can apply an MCT operation to multiple rows. For example, you can send configuration details to multiple NSGs in a single operation by first selecting the rows you want to send. To select multiple rows 1. In Device Information/Details, place the mouse pointer on the required row heading and drag it along the required row headings until the last required row and release the mouse. To select all rows 1. Do either of the following: Click Ctrl+A Harmonic Inc. 21 MCT Version x, Rev B

25 Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the Clipboard Tools Click Select All button Select All button Selecting Multiple Cells To select a range of cells, do either of the following: Using mouse - click the first cell in the range, and then drag the mouse pointer to the last cell. Using keyboard - click the first cell in the range, and then hold down <SHIFT> while pressing the arrow keys to extend the selection Copying and Pasting Cells In any page, you can select cells across columns and rows, copy them, and paste them into other rows across the same columns. For example, you can select a group of cells spanning, say, five columns and three rows, and paste the selected data into another set of three rows, or a multiple of 3, across the same five columns. To select cells 1. Click on a cell. A frame surrounds the cell. 2. Do either of the following: Use Shift+click or Shift+Ctrl+click to select additional cells, Or Drag the mouse across rows and columns. To copy and paste 1. Highlight the cells you want to copy. 2. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click Copy or press Ctrl-C. 3. Select the section into which to paste the copied data. The number of rows you select determines the extent of the operation. For example, if you copy three rows and then select six rows, the copied data is duplicated over the six rows; if you copy one cell and then select the column by clicking its heading, MCT copies the data to all the cells in that column. 4. On the Home tab, in the Clipboard group, click Paste or press Ctrl-V Editing Cells 1. Double click the cell to be edited. 2. Edit the cell. 3. To apply changes, click <Enter>. 4. To cancel changes, click <ESC> Harmonic Inc. 22 MCT Version x, Rev B

26 Chapter 2 MCT User Interface Getting to Know the Clipboard Tools Copying to/from Excel You can select cells or rows and copy them to/from Excel. However, when copying from Excel to any page of MCT, invalid values are rejected and are not updated in MCT Harmonic Inc. 23 MCT Version x, Rev B

27 Chapter 3 MCT Basics 3.1 Managing MCT Database MCT Database Files Configuration records are stored in an MCT database. You can maintain multiple databases to store different sets of configuration records for separate groups of NSGs, sites or networks. The database may contain records of various types of NSGs all of which are part of a site or network. All database files have the *.mct extension and by default are stored in the default installation location in the DB folder; C:\Program Files\Harmonic\MCT\MCT 9.0\DB Creating a New Database File You can create a new database or create a new database that is based on an existing database. To create a new database Do either of the following: In the Quick Access Bar, click New File. Or, Click MCT button and select New. The MCT screen is updated to present a new database: 2012 Harmonic Inc. 24 MCT Version x, Rev B

28 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing MCT Database To create a database file based on another database file 1. Open an existing database. 2. Click MCT button. 3. Click Save As. 4. In Save MCT File dialog, do the following: 5. Click Save. select the required location for saving the new database enter the required name for the new database. The new file is now the current one. Now you can change template and the configuration records. After creating or opening a database file, the NSG type and the database filename appear on the MCT window's title bar, along with the MCT's version number. MCT version, current logged in user, database name and path Opening a Database To open a database 1. Click MCT button. 2. Do either of the following: In Recent Documents, select the required database. Or, 3. Click Open. 1. Navigate to the required location and select the database. 2. Click Open Backing Up MCT Databases You should regularly back up the MCT database files to protect against hard disk failure or corruption. The file carries the name you assigned to it followed by the.mct extension. To back up an MCT database: 1. On the MCT computer, navigate to the directory your MCT database files are stored. The default directory is: C:\Program Files\Harmonic\MCT\MCT xx.xx\data\db. 2. Copy the database files (.mct) to removable media Working with Previous MCT Databases For detailed instructions, see 1.4 Migrating to a Higher MCT Version on page Harmonic Inc. 25 MCT Version x, Rev B

29 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing Sites 3.2 Managing Sites The Navigation pane allows you to manage and browse through the databases. The Navigation pane is divided into the following two sections: Tree view section Filters Database Tree view - allows to arrange the database by creating sites and managing the NSG devices in each site Filters - allows to view the database via the NSG type filter. To view all NSG types, see Viewing a Site and devices - Using Filters on page Tree view of Sites and NSGs The tree view includes three node types. The following table lists the various nodes, their graphical sign and explains the tree view hierarchy: Table 3-1: Graphical Sign Node Type MCT Select to add a site Site Select to add a device NSG Select to add another device to the site Adding, Renaming and Deleting a Site To add a new site 1. Select the MCT site. 2. On the Home tab, in Editor group, click Add. A new site is added to the tree. 3. Enter a required name and press <Enter> Harmonic Inc. 26 MCT Version x, Rev B

30 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing Sites To rename a site 1. Select the required site. 2. Click the site. The site name becomes editable. 3. Type the required name. To delete a site 1. In the tree view, select the required site. 2. On the Home tab, in Editor group, click Delete Viewing a Site and devices - Using Filters The filters located at the bottom of the Navigation pane, define which NSG types appear in the database. By default, the tree view shows all sites included in the database with NSG 9000 devices, as NSG 9000 is the default filter. Once you select a filter, the Navigation pane is updated according to the selected device and only these devices are enabled in the Navigation pane and their parameters can be configured. You can also view all devices in a site regardless of the selected filter as explained in Viewing Sites with All Device Types on page 28. If you selected to view all device types in tree view, device types other than the selected filter appear in the tree view as disabled devices. To view a site with a device filter 1. In the Navigation pane, select a site. 2. In the Navigation pane, click the required filter. The tabs are updated accordingly and the relevant devices are enabled: Devices included by filter Devices of another type Selected filter 2012 Harmonic Inc. 27 MCT Version x, Rev B

31 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing Sites To customize the filters 1. Click the Filter Customizing button. 2. Select one of the following options: Show More Buttons - click to add more filters Show Fewer Buttons - click to remove filters Add Remove Buttons - click to select the filter you wish to remove from the navigation pane Viewing Sites with All Device Types 1. Click MCT button. 2. Click MCT Options. The following dialog appears: To view all devices in the site, click here 3. Check View all device type in tree view. All NSG devices appear in the site. NSG devices of type other than the selected filter are italicized and appear in gray Harmonic Inc. 28 MCT Version x, Rev B

32 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group) 3.3 Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group) To configure NSG devices, add them to the MCT database. Once you added an NSG, you can set its configuration parameters. You can add NSG devices by the following: A single device with default values Range of NSG devices with default values Single NSG device with cloned records Range of NSG devices with cloned records All of these options are grouped in the MCT ribbon in the Editor group Understanding the Editor Group The Editor group includes options that are enabled when one of the following is selected as the picture below shows: a site a device Details section Site is selected - enabled Editor options Device is selected - enabled Editor options Details section is selected - some enabled Editor options The following table lists the options with a short explanation: Table 3-2: Editor Group s Editor Option Enabled Condition Reference Add MCT node is selected to add a site Site is selected to add a device. See, Adding, Renaming and Deleting a Site on page 26 See Adding a Device on page 30. Add Range A site is selected. See Adding a Range of NSGs with Default Values on page 30. Delete A site is selected to delete a site. A device is selected to delete a device. See, Adding, Renaming and Deleting a Site on page 26 See, Deleting an NSG Device on page Harmonic Inc. 29 MCT Version x, Rev B

33 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group) Table 3-2: Editor Group s Editor Option Enabled Condition Reference Clone A device is selected See, Adding a Single Device with Cloned Values on page 31. Multi Clone A device is selected See, Adding a Range of NSGs with Cloned Values on page 32. Set Bulk Offset In M-CMTS tab, an M-CMTS session is selected. See, Setting DOCSIS Sync Compensation Offset on page 128. Sort Virtual Devices (ISA) tab is selected. See Back Forward Find Moving between tabs It allows to return to the last tab you viewed. Moving between tabs It allows to return to the tab you were on before you clicked the Back button. When one of the MCT page is selected, such as Device Information, Details, Navigation pane etc. See 3.5 Finding the s You Want on page 35 See 3.5 Finding the s You Want on page 35 See Find Feature on page Adding a Device To add a single device with default values, do the following: 1. Select the site node and click Add. A new record is created at the bottom of the list. The new record uses default values. 2. Enter values for the parameters that are not part of the template, such as IP and MAC addresses. NOTE: The ETH1 IP address always comes up blank and must be configured. This address must be unique across the MCT database since it is used to identify the NSG device. 3. Click Save Adding a Range of NSGs with Default Values To create a group of NSG devices with default configuration, use the Add Range option. The created devices have default configuration as defined in MCT Options > Defaults page. The Add Range command automatically increments the ETH1 IP address of the new devices, and allows you to auto-increment the GbE IP addresses as well. To add a range of NSG records 1. Select the site you wish to add to it multiple NSG devices. 2. Click Add Range Harmonic Inc. 30 MCT Version x, Rev B

34 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group) The Add Range dialog appears: 3. In From IP Address, enter the Eth1 IP address of the first NSG device to be added. 4. In Quantity, enter the number of NSG devices to be added. 5. In Increase GbE Unicast IP, check to create an automatic range of IPs. 6. In Base Unicast IP, enter an IP address. The IPs in the range are increased from the entered IP address. 7. Click Ok. To clone a range of NSGs 1. Select the NSG you want to duplicate and click Multi Clone. The Duplicate NSG to Range dialog appears. 2. In From IP Address, enter the IP addresses for the ETH1 port of the new NSGs. 3. In Quantity, enter the number of NSG records to be added. 4. In Increase GbE Unicast IP, check to create an automatic range of IPs. 5. In Base Unicast IP, enter an IP address. The IPs in the range are increased from the entered IP address. 6. Click OK. NSG records are added to the site of the selected NSG device. The newly added records appear with the same configuration as the cloned device Adding a Single Device with Cloned Values If you wish to create an NSG device with configuration that is meant to be very similar to an existing NSG device, add the device by cloning the record of the existing NSG. Once you clone the record, modify the information to fit your specific NSG requirements Harmonic Inc. 31 MCT Version x, Rev B

35 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group) The clone procedure does not copy properties that must remain unique (e.g. IP and MAC addresses). Such fields remain empty in the duplicated records. To clone a single device 1. Select the NSG device whose record you wish to clone. 2. Click Clone. A record is added to the list of NSGs with the same values as of the source NSG Adding a Range of NSGs with Cloned Values If you wish to create NSG devices with configuration that is meant to be very similar to an existing NSG device, add the new devices by duplicating the record of the existing NSG. Once you duplicated the records, modify the information to fit your specific NSG requirements. MCT allows you to duplicate multiple records in one operation. The duplication procedure does not copy properties that must remain unique (e.g. IP and MAC addresses). Such fields remain empty in the duplicated records. To clone a range of NSGs 1. Select the NSG you want to duplicate and click Multi Clone. The Duplicate NSG to Range dialog appears. 2. In From IP Address, enter the IP addresses for the ETH1 port of the new NSGs. 3. In Quantity, enter the number of NSG records to be added. 4. In Increase GbE Unicast IP, check to create an automatic range of IPs. 5. In Base Unicast IP, enter an IP address. The IPs in the range are increased from the entered IP address. 6. Click OK. NSG records are added to the site of the selected NSG device. The newly added records appear with the same configuration as the cloned device Deleting an NSG Device To delete a device 1. Do one of the following: Select the device to be removed and click Delete. The device is deleted from the database and is removed from the Navigation pane. 2. Click Save Harmonic Inc. 32 MCT Version x, Rev B

36 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Managing NSGs in a Site (Editor Group) Setting Device Eth1 IP Address and Information As soon as you add a device, enter the Eth1 IP address of the device. The Eth1 IP address always comes up blank and must be configured. This address must be unique across the MCT database since it is used for identifying the NSG device. To enter the Eth1 IP address 1. Do either of the following: In the Tree View section, type the required Eth1 IP address Or In Details, select the Platform tab and in ETH1, enter the required Eth1 IP address. In Device Details the Eth1 IP address is updated as entered. Once you have entered the Eth1 IP address of the device, configure the device information details as explained below. The details should allow to easily identify the device To define device information Enter the following details: Table 3-3: Device Information s Device Name Rack Slot Comments NMX Network Group Actual Firmware Version Expected Firmware Version Enter the name of the device to allow easy identification of the physical device. The number of the rack holding this NSG. The Rack and Slot ID fields are provided so that you can associate the physical NSG chassis with this entry. The number of the slot in the rack holding this NSG. The Rack and Slot ID fields are provided so that you can associate the physical NSG chassis with this entry. Enter any comments to allow easy identification. The NMX Network Group (also referred to as Map) to which this NSG belongs. View the actual firmware Select the firmware you wish to download on the device 2012 Harmonic Inc. 33 MCT Version x, Rev B

37 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Supporting Various NSG Versions 3.4 Supporting Various NSG Versions To allow full compatibility between MCT and NSG firmware versions of various NSG types, MCT is furnished with the Version Support mechanism. This mechanism consists of a table that lists supported baseline versions and expected versions: Base line version - a release of an NSG version with a new configuration database structure. This database may be common also to proceeding releases. These releases are called Expected versions. Expected version - a release of an NSG version which utilizes a configuration database structure of a previous release. That is, a baseline version Customizing the List of Supported Versions of NSG Firmware To manage the firmware versions, use the Supported Versions page. The Supported Version page allows you to customize the list of expected versions only by doing the following: To add expected versions only. Each added version is based on a baseline version. To add an expected version, first consult Harmonic Customer Support. Harmonic support personal will inform you of the baseline version required for adding the expected version. To delete expected versions only. To de-activate a baseline version. Once you de-activate a base line version, you remove it from the Expected Firmware Versions list in the Device Information section. To add an expected version NOTE: Add an expected version only after consulting with Harmonic Customer Support and obtaining the required baseline version. 1. Click MCT button. 2. Click MCT Options. 3. In the Navigation pane, select Versions Harmonic Inc. 34 MCT Version x, Rev B

38 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Finding the s You Want The MCT Supported Firmware page appears: 4. Open the Type list and select the required NSG type. The Supported Versions list is updated to display the supported baseline versions for the selected NSG type. By default, all baseline versions are active. That is, all baseline versions appear in Detailed Information, under Expected Firmware Version. 5. To add the required version, click Add. A blank row appears. 6. Open the Baseline Version list and select the baseline version. 7. In Expected Version, type the required customized version in the following pattern: xx.xx.xx.xxx 8. To allow the customized versions of the baseline version to appear in the Expected Firmware Version, verify that Active is selected. 9. To apply changes and to close the page, click OK. The added version appears in the Expected Firmware Version list. You can select it to allow MCT to display the tabs that this version supports. Now you can synchronize MCT with the NSG devices. 3.5 Finding the s You Want To find the attribute you need and to move along between the various MCT sections and tabs, use the following buttons/features included in the Editor group: Back Forward Find To move between the tabs, use the Back and Forward buttons. See Table 3-2: Editor Group s on page Find Feature The find feature allows you to quickly locate a parameter in the MCT tabs and in the selected section of the MCT. Selected sections may be one of the following: Navigation pane 2012 Harmonic Inc. 35 MCT Version x, Rev B

39 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Finding the s You Want Device Information section Details section and any sub section of the Details section. The search applies to the selected tab only. Sub section of the Details section To search MCT 1. Select the required section to search and find the parameter. 2. Click the Find button. 3. In Text to Find, enter the parameter you wish to find. 4. Click Next. 5. To browse through the found items, click Previous, or Next Harmonic Inc. 36 MCT Version x, Rev B

40 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions 3.6 Getting to Know the MCT Actions The following MCT actions are organized in the Ribbon in the Actions group. All of these actions affect the NSGs: Actions in NSG 9000 filter Actions in NSG G filter Launch Web Client Download Firmware Reset Set Clock Change Password - enabled for NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG 9000 only. Convert to NSG G - enabled for NSG 9000 only. Convert to NSG G - enabled for NSG G only Launching NSG Web Client In case you need to open the web client of an NSG, do the following: 1. Select the required NSG. 2. On the Home tab, in the Actions group, click Launch Web Client. The main page of the device web client opens Resetting NSGs You can reset (power-cycled) the NSGs through the MCT. Resetting an NSG interrupts services in the device. 1. Select the NSGs you want to reset. 2. On the Home tab, in the Actions group, click Reset. The Action Log dialog appears. In MCT, in Device Information section, the next to the record of the device. 3. Wait until in Action Log, Finish is enabled. 4. Click Finish. The device is up and running and in MCT, in Device Information section, the appears Setting the Internal NSG Clock icon appears You can set the NSG's internal clock either individually or synchronize a number of NSG internal clocks together using the MCT. 1. Select the NSGs you want to set their clock. 2. On the Home tab, in the Actions group, click Set Clock. 3. In the message that appears, click Yes. icon 2012 Harmonic Inc. 37 MCT Version x, Rev B

41 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions The Action Log dialog appears. 4. Wait until Finish is enabled. 5. Click Finish. NOTE: To change a password, see Changing NSG Password on page Changing NSG Password NOTE: This option is available for NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG 9000 only. You can change both the Monitor and the Configure password. To Change the NSG password via the MCT 1. Select the NSG or NSG devices you want to change passwords for. 2. On the Home tab, in the Actions group, click Change Password. The following window appears: 3. To change the password for Monitor access level, select Change Monitor Password. 4. To change the password for Configure access level, select Change Configure Password. 5. Enter the New Monitor/Configure Password. 6. Confirm the New Password data. 7. Select OK. A message box appears: This action will cause the selected NSGs to change their passwords. Do you want to continue? 8. Select Yes in the message box. The Action Log dialog appears. 9. Wait until the action is complete. 10. Click Finish Converting NSG 9000 to NSG G To convert NSG 9000 to NSG G, do the following: Get NSG 9000 configuration and save the configuration of the NSG 9000 device. Save the NSG 9000 configuration under a unique file name. Install hardware components to enable the device to work as an NSG G device 2012 Harmonic Inc. 38 MCT Version x, Rev B

42 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions Convert NSG 9000 to NSG G Configure NSG G unique parameters Send configuration to device MCT converts any NSG 9000 version to NSG G version 2.1 only! That is, MCT Details section displays the configurable parameters of version 2.1 only. For MCT to display the configurable parameters of a different version, select in Device Information > Expected Firmware Version the required expected version. See 3.4 Supporting Various NSG Versions on page Getting NSG 9000 Configuration To save the current configuration of the NSG 9000 device, save it to the database. See Backing Up MCT Databases on page 25. Conversion is allowed only if the following configuration applies: The NSG 9000 device is working in PM scrambling mode. If not, change the scrambling mode to PM Scrambling prior to the conversion. NSG G supports PM scrambling only. The NSG 9000 device emulation template is set to Normal. If not, change the emulation template to Normal prior to the conversion Installing Required Hardware To convert NSG 9000 to NSG G, replace/install the following hardware components: Replace the NSG 9000 main board with the main board of NSG G Replace, or install the QAM-RF modules. All QAM-RF modules should be NSG-8R1G module type. For details and instructions, see NSG G HW and Installation User Guide Converting NSG 9000 to NSG G During the conversion, the following takes place: The device is removed from the NSG 9000 filter and appears in the NSG G filter with its IP address. MCT adjusts the configurable parameters to match NSG G version 2.1 and it retains the values configured for NSG The configurable parameters unique to NSG G are added with default values. MCT handles all QAM-RF modules as modules with up to eight QAM-RF channels per RF port. The additional QAMs appear with default values. At the end of the conversion process, configure the features that are unique to NSG G. For example, configure the parameters of the additional QAMs. To convert 1. While in NSG 9000 filter, select the required device(s) to be converted. 2. On the Home tab, in the Actions group, click Convert to NSG G. NOTE: The Convert to NSG G button is enabled in the NSG 9000 filter only Harmonic Inc. 39 MCT Version x, Rev B

43 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions Once the conversion is complete, the NSG 9000 devices are removed from the NSG 9000 filter and appear under the NSG G filter. The Convert icon appears next to the converted devices. Convert icon Conversion is to version Continue by configuring the configurable NSG G parameters NSG G Unique s See Configuring NSG G on page Sending Configuration to device See Sending Configuration to NSGs on page 55. Once you execute a action against the device, like Send, the Convert icon is removed Converting NSG G to NSG G NOTE: The following section refers to conversion from NSG G version 2.6 to NSG G version 3.1. To convert NSG G to NSG G, do the following: Get NSG G configuration and save the configuration of the NSG G device. Save the NSG G configuration under a unique file name. Install hardware components to enable the device to work as an NSG G device Convert NSG G to NSG G Send to device Optional - Configure NSG G unique parameters and send to device Getting NSG G Configuration To save the current configuration of the NSG G device, save it to the database. See Backing Up MCT Databases on page Harmonic Inc. 40 MCT Version x, Rev B

44 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions Conversion is allowed only if the following configuration applies: The NSG G device is working in PM scrambling mode. If not, change the scrambling mode to PM Scrambling prior to the conversion. NSG G supports PM scrambling only. The NSG G device emulation template is set to Normal. If not, change the emulation template to Normal prior to the conversion. The NSG G device is working in Annex B. If it is working in Annex A or C, change it prior to conversion. In NSG G Module Redundancy is disabled. If not, disable Module Redundancy prior to conversion. In NSG G the power lever per QAM is in the range of dbmv. In NSG G the Hold Time in the NGOD tab should be 10 seconds and up. The NSG G device mode is set to Standalone. In NSG G, the frequency steps of adjacent channels should be a multiplication of 6MHz. The NSG G is working with one of the following QAM managers: VOD, NGOD, or ISA Installing Required Hardware To convert NSG G to NSG G, replace/install the following hardware components: Replace the NSG G main board with the main board of NSG G Replace, or install the QAM-RF modules. All QAM-RF modules should be NSG-36R1G module type. Replace the NSG G front panel - front panel of NSG G should have the Turbo icon. Replace the NSG G power supply - power supply units for NSG G should have a Harmonic part number with the suffix 02 or 03. For details and instructions, see NSG G HW and Installation User Guide Converting NSG G to NSG G During the conversion, the following takes place: The device is removed from the NSG G filter and appears in the NSG G filter with its IP address. MCT adjusts the configurable parameters to match NSG G version 3.1 and it retains the values configured for NSG G. The configurable parameters unique to NSG G are added with default values. MCT handles all QAM-RF modules as modules with up to 24 QAM-RF channels per RF port. The additional QAMs appear with default values. At the end of the conversion process, configure the features that are unique to NSG G. For example, configure the parameters of the additional QAMs, speed to GbE ports and more Harmonic Inc. 41 MCT Version x, Rev B

45 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions To convert 1. While in NSG G filter, select the required device(s) to be converted. 2. On the Home tab, in the Actions group, click Convert to NSG G. NOTE: The Convert to NSG G button is enabled in the NSG G filter only. Once the conversion is complete, the NSG G devices are removed from the NSG G filter and appear under the NSG G filter. The Convert icon appears next to the converted devices. Convert icon Conversion is to version Send configuration to the device. See Sending Configuration to NSGs on page 55. Once you execute an action against the device, like Send, the Convert icon is removed. 4. Reboot the device. 5. Continue by configuring the configurable NSG G parameters NSG G Unique s See Configuring NSG G on page Action Status Dialog When you activate an action that has an impact on the NSGs, or checks configuration against the NSGs, the MCT indicates the following: Action progress by means of the Working and Completed progress bars in the Action Log dialog. Action status by means of the Status and Info sections in the Action log dialog. Status of the operation by means of a status icon that appears in the row heading Harmonic Inc. 42 MCT Version x, Rev B

46 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Getting to Know the MCT Actions Reading Action Log Dialog The Action Log includes the following: Title bar - type of actions Action status: Green - successful Red - failed Info button to view an.xml file sent by the device working progress bar Complete progress bar Counter Action completed on some of the required NSGs. Working shows that the action is performed against additional required NSGs Action completed on all of the required NSGs. Working shows that the action was performed against all of the required NSGs Title bar - indicates the procedure that is currently taking place. Status - once the procedure is complete, the Status section displays details regarding the execution of the procedure per each device. If the procedure fails details are displayed in red. Info... - click this button to view an.xml file sent by the device. This file includes error indications when the action failed. Working progress bar - displays that the action is taking place. Complete progress bar - progresses to display the completion of the action relatively to the number of required devices. In addition, a counter updates the number of NSGs on which the action was executed and completed out of the total required NSGs Reading Action Status Icons The following table lists the available action icons When you activate an action that has an impact on the NSGs, the MCT indicates the status of the operation by means of a status icon that appears in row heading. The following table lists the available action icons: Table 3-4: Action Status Icons Icon The last executed action completed successfully The last executed action completed successfully, but some discrepancies exist. Usually appears after executing the Compare with Device action. See Comparing Configurations on page Harmonic Inc. 43 MCT Version x, Rev B

47 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware Table 3-4: Action Status Icons Icon The required action failed. For example, could not execute Get from Device because device firmware is unsupported. MCT and NSG are fully synchronized MCT and NSG are not synchronized When resetting the device. When reset is complete, and the device is up and running, this icon changes to this icon. Firmware installation should be finalized. Any action that affects the device is not applied and Reset cancels the firmware installation. The whole row is selected. An attribute is selected Indicates that the device was converted from NSG 9000 to NSG G. Once you execute an action against the device, the icon is removed. The following picture shows a common action status Not-synchronized, last action failed Synchronized, last action succeeded Not-synchronized, last action partially succeeded Not-synchronized, last action succeeded 3.7 Downloading NSG Firmware Via MCT, you may download the firmware of multiple NSG devices. The number of NSG devices that may be upgraded simultaneously is unlimited. MCT supports the following firmware download procedures: Firmware download for NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG See Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG G on page 45. Firmware download for NSG G. See Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG G on page 46. Firmware download for NSG G. See Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG G on page Harmonic Inc. 44 MCT Version x, Rev B

48 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware The firmware download options are organized in the Ribbon in the Firmware Installation group: Download Firmware - click to start the procedure and allocate the firmware file. Finalize & Reboot - Applies to NSG G version 2.1 & up only. Click to finalize the download and to reboot the device with the new firmware. Click this button when Manual is selected in the Firmware Installation dialog. Abort Installation - Applies to NSG G version 2.1 & up only. Click to abort the installation Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG 8108, 9116 and NSG G NOTE: To upgrade from NSG 9000 version or x to , use MCT 9.1 only. To download the NSG Firmware 1. Select the devices you wish to upgrade their firmware. 2. Synchronize MCT with the required devices by clicking Get From Device. 3. Save the database file. 4. For backup purposes, save database under another name by selecting MCT Button > Save As. 5. In Device Information, in Expected Version, select the expected version. For managing NSG supported versions, see Customizing the List of Supported Versions of NSG Firmware on page 34. The Details section is updated to display the tabs of the selected version Harmonic Inc. 45 MCT Version x, Rev B

49 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware Supported version and relevant tabs Supported version and relevant tabs 6. On the Home tab, in the Firmware Installation group, click Download Firmware. A confirmation message appears. 7. Click Yes. 8. In the dialog that appears, browse to the firmware file. 9. Click Open. The Action Log dialog appears. The device will reboot with the new firmware. Once the download is complete for all NSGs, the Finish button is enabled. 10. Click Finish. 11. Configure the devices via MCT. See Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) on page 70 and Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up on page On the Home tab, in the Synchronize group, click Send to Device Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG G To upgrade NSG G, select either of the following methods: Upgrade tool - an Internal server upgrade. See Downloading using Installer on page 47 Legacy upgrade - an External server upgrade. See Upgrading NSG G Firmware Using an External Server on page Harmonic Inc. 46 MCT Version x, Rev B

50 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware Upgrading Limitations Upgrading a firmware depends on the Main Board Storage Format. The following table lists the upgrading firmware limitations due to the supported storage format: Table 3-5: Upgrading Limitations Main Board Storage Format Supported by Versions Upgrade/downgrade limitations Single partition NSG9K6G ver. 2.0 NSG9K6G ver 2.2 or higher Cannot run NSG9K6G ver. 2.1 Dual partition NSG9K6G ver. 2.1 or higher Cannot run with NSG9K6G ver Downloading using Installer The NSG G firmware is packaged and delivered within the installer application. The installer turns firmware upgrade into an easy and straightforward procedure. To upgrade using the NSG installer refer to the following instructions. NSG installer includes the new firmware package. The name of the NSG installer indicates the device type and the firmware version. For example: NSG9K6G Installerv1.1.5.exe, where: NSG9K6G device type firmware version Installer application name NOTE: Firmware upgrade is service affecting. To download NSG firmware for NSG G devices using Installer NOTE: If you wish to save the configuration prior to upgrade, save the database file. See 3.1 Managing MCT Database on page Select the devices you wish to upgrade their firmware. 2. In Device Information, in Expected Version, select the expected version. For managing NSG supported versions, see Customizing the List of Supported Versions of NSG Firmware on page 34. The Details section is updated to display the tabs of the selected version. 3. On the Home tab, in the Firmware Installation group, click Download Firmware. A confirmation message appears. 4. Click Yes Harmonic Inc. 47 MCT Version x, Rev B

51 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware The following dialog appears: 5. Open the Upgrade Type list and select Standalone NSG Installer. The following dialog appears: 6. To locate the upgrade firmware file, click Browse. Installer file 2012 Harmonic Inc. 48 MCT Version x, Rev B

52 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware 7. Click Open. Installer file 8. Click Install. The Action log dialog appears. Once Finish is enabled, the device is running with the newly installed firmware and the firmware installation process is complete Downloading Firmware of NSG9000-6G using an External server Firmware upgrade of NSG G is based on HTTP download and requires an HTTP server on the LAN. To download, you need the following: Either of the following HTTP servers as the Upgrade server: Apache Web server - Harmonic provides a customized installation package Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager - Comes free with Windows XP Professional and Windows 2000 The HTTP server is configured with the Harmonic/NSG9K6G directory The HTTP server and the MCT computer are connected to the same network The firmware installation procedure of NSG G version 2.1 and up allows to continue working with the device and to finalize and reboot the device at your own convenience. In addition, you can monitor the installation process via the Info button in the Action Log dialog. The following download procedure applies for both NSG G version 2.0 and version 2.1 & up unless else is indicated. To download NSG firmware for NSG G devices NOTE: If you wish to save the configuration prior to upgrade, save the database file. See 3.1 Managing MCT Database on page Select the devices you wish to upgrade their firmware. 2. In Device Information, in Expected Version, select the expected version. For managing NSG supported versions, see Customizing the List of Supported Versions of NSG Firmware on page 34. The Details section is updated to display the tabs of the selected version. 3. On the Home tab, in the Firmware Installation group, click Download Firmware. A confirmation message appears. 4. Click Yes Harmonic Inc. 49 MCT Version x, Rev B

53 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware The following dialog appears: 5. In Repository Server IP Address, verify that the IP address of the HTTP server appears. 6. To populate the list of expected versions, click Get Available Versions. 7. Open the Expected Firmware Version list and select the required version. 8. For NSG G 2.1 & up only Open the Finalize & Reboot after Install list and select either of the following: Automatic - to automatically reboot after installing the firmware Manual - to finalize installation and to reboot at your convenience. NOTE: Manual is available for NSG G dual partition only. For single partition, select Automatic. To check partition type, select the Platform tab, Partition Type. 9. Click Install. The Action log dialog appears. NOTE: In MCT 9.6 a pre-upgrade script is executed. If the script fails, record the error number and call Harmonic Customer Support. 10. For NSG G 2.0 only Wait until Finish is enabled in the Action Log dialog. Once Finish is enabled, the process is complete and the device is running with the newly installed firmware. For NSG G 2.1 & up only Continue working. You may check the progress of the installation by viewing Status and clicking Info in the Action Log dialog. If Automatic is selected in Finalize & Reboot after Install, once Finish is enabled, the device is running with the newly installed firmware and the firmware installation process is complete. If Manual is selected in Finalize & Reboot after Install, once Finish is enabled, the Waiting for Finalizing & Reboot icon appears next to the device IP address and the following applies: The device is running with the previous installed version Any action that affects the device such as Set Clock, Purge ECM, is not applied. If you reset the device, the firmware installation is removed and you need to re-start the installation Harmonic Inc. 50 MCT Version x, Rev B

54 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware 11. For NSG G dual partition only If Manual is selected in Finalize & Reboot after Install, click Finalize & Reboot to complete the firmware download. NOTE: Download is complete only after reboot Downloading NSG Firmware - NSG G To upgrade NSG G, select either of the following methods: Upgrade tool - an Internal server upgrade Legacy upgrade - an External server upgrade Upgrading Limitations Upgrading NSG G version 3.0 to version 3.1 is prohibited. Downgrading NSG G version 3.1 to version 3.0 is prohibited. NOTE: If you wish to save the configuration prior to upgrade, save the database file. See 3.1 Managing MCT Database on page Upgrading NSG G Firmware With Installer To download NSG firmware for NSG G using installer, see page Upgrading NSG G Firmware Using an External Server Firmware upgrade of NSG G is based on HTTP download and requires an HTTP server on the LAN. To download, you need the following: Either of the following HTTP servers as the Upgrade server: Apache Web server - Harmonic provides a customized installation package Internet Information Services (IIS) Manager - Comes free with Windows XP Professional and Windows 2000 The HTTP server is configured with the Harmonic/NSG9K40G directory The HTTP server and the MCT computer are connected to the same network The firmware installation procedure of NSG G allows to continue working with the device and to finalize and reboot the device at your own convenience. In addition, you can monitor the installation process via the Info button in the Action Log dialog. 1. Select the devices you wish to upgrade their firmware. 2. In Device Information, in Expected Version, select the expected version. For managing NSG supported versions, see Customizing the List of Supported Versions of NSG Firmware on page 34. The Details section is updated to display the tabs of the selected version. 3. On the Home tab, in the Firmware Installation group, click Download Firmware. A confirmation message appears. 4. Click Yes Harmonic Inc. 51 MCT Version x, Rev B

55 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Downloading NSG Firmware The following dialog appears: 5. In Repository Server IP Address, verify that the IP address of the HTTP server appears. 6. To populate the list of expected versions, click Get Available Versions. 7. Open the Expected Firmware Version list and select the required version. 8. Open the Finalize & Reboot after Install list and select either of the following: Automatic - to automatically reboot after installing the firmware Manual - to finalize installation and to reboot at your convenience. 9. Click Install. The Action log dialog appears. 10. Continue working. You may check the progress of the installation by viewing Status and clicking Info in the Action Log dialog. If Automatic is selected in Finalize & Reboot after Install, once Finish is enabled, the device is running with the newly installed firmware and the firmware installation process is complete. If Manual is selected in Finalize & Reboot after Install, once Finish is enabled, the Waiting for Finalizing & Reboot icon appears next to the device IP address and the following applies: The device is running with the previous installed version Any action that affects the device such as Set Clock, Purge ECM, is not applied. If you reset the device, the firmware installation is removed and you need to re-start the installation. 11. If Manual is selected in Finalize & Reboot after Install, click Finalize & Reboot to complete the firmware download Aborting the Installation If you wish to cancel the firmware installation, click Abort Installation Harmonic Inc. 52 MCT Version x, Rev B

56 Chapter 3 MCT Basics MCT and NSGs Synchronization 3.8 MCT and NSGs Synchronization An NSG is out of sync when the configuration data stored in it is different from the configuration data stored in the corresponding MCT database. If such a discrepancy occurs, you can use MCT tools to synchronize the two. In general, such situation should be avoided but may occur in a number of specific cases such as: Uncontrolled changes to MCT configuration data. If a new MCT database is setup for an NSG site that was already configured by other means. To check the synchronization status, you can run a comparison between the MCT database and the NSGs. In this case MCT only reads the discrepancies that may exist. NOTE: MCT may approach up to 20 NSG devices at the same time. If you cancel a synchronization procedure, cancellation applies to the following batch of 20 devices. To verify the exact devices that synchronization was applied to, check the log Comparing Configurations This features allows to compare between the device configuration on MCT and on the NSG itself. 1. Select the NSGs to validate. 2. On the Home tab, in the Synchronization group, click Compare with Device. The Action Log dialog appears. In this case, MCT reads the configuration details of the selected NSGs, one by one. Comments regarding the completion of the action per device, appear in the Action Log. 3. Wait until Finish is enabled. 4. Click Finish. In MCT, in Device Information next to the selected NSGs the following icons appear: If the configuration details are synchronized the record. If discrepancies exist, the section Reading Compare with Device Details icon appears next to the device icon appears next to the device record. See following If following Compare with Device, discrepancies exist, you may view Compare with Device details. To read compare with device details 1. Double click the icon Harmonic Inc. 53 MCT Version x, Rev B

57 Chapter 3 MCT Basics MCT and NSGs Synchronization The Comparison Results for <IP Address> page appears. Available tabs. Tabs in red are tabs with discrepancies Attributes with discrepancies MCT value NSG value 2. View the results with the following guidelines: Table 3-6: Comparison Results Item Comment Navigation pane - Red text Tabs with attributes with discrepancies Click to view this attribute only RowID Number of record Relevant when there is more than one instance Filed Blue column Green column The attribute with discrepancies MCT value NSG value Synchronizing Configurations To synchronize the two, you need to get the current configuration data from the NSGs into the MCT database. To synchronize by importing the NSG configuration 1. Select NSGs to synchronize. 2. On the Home tab, in the Synchronization group, click Get From Device. The Action Log dialog appears. 3. Wait until Finish is enabled. 4. Click Finish. When completed successfully the icon appears next to the NSGs Harmonic Inc. 54 MCT Version x, Rev B

58 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Exporting Information When Get from Target is finished and the device is Sending Configuration to NSGs 1. Select the required device(s). If Site node is selected, MCT sends NSG configuration to NSG devices of the selected site. If Device nodes are selected, MCT sends configuration to all selected NSGs. 2. On the Home tab, in the Synchronization group, click Send to Device. The Action Log dialog appears. 3. Wait until Finish is enabled. 4. Click Finish. When completed successfully the icon appears next to the NSGs. The following table lists limitations of Get from Device and Send to Device options: Table 3-7: Get and Send Limitations NSG Configuration in MCT Actual NSG Configuration Get From Device Send to Device Type: 8108/9116 Ver: PM Type: 8108/9116 Ver: Non PM Supported, MCT changes encryption mode as per device Not Supported, MCT displays an error message. Change unit type. Type: 8108/9116 Ver: Non PM Type: 8108/9116 Ver: PM Supported, MCT changes encryption mode as per device. Not Supported, MCT displays an error message. Change unit type. Type: any Ver: PM/Non PM Type: any but other than MCT Not Supported, MCT displays an error messages Not Supported, MCT displays an error messages Type: X Ver: Supported Type: X Ver: supported version different than MCT Supported, MCT changes GUI as per device version Not Supported, MCT displays an error message. Type: X Ver: Supported Type: Y (different than X) Ver: supported version different than MCT Not Supported, MCT displays an error messages Not Supported, MCT displays an error message. Type: any Ver: Supported Type: any Ver: Un supported Not Supported, MCT displays an error message Not Supported, MCT displays an error message 3.9 Exporting Information You can export device configuration to the following: NMX, see Exporting to NMX on page 56. SDV Session Manager of BigBand, see Exporting to SDV Session Manager of BigBand on page Harmonic Inc. 55 MCT Version x, Rev B

59 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Exporting Information SDV Session Manager of Cisco, see Exporting to SDV Session Manager of Cisco on page 57. You can also export the device up time, see Exporting to NMX Once you have configured a large number of NSG units, you may export their data to NMX, and use NMX for monitoring the alarms status and reporting on QAM utilization. MCT exports the data into a template file that NMX can import as a new NMX map. The file name is as follows: <database name>.tpt. The file is saved in the same location as the MCT database. Each <database name>.tpt file includes the selected NSGs with the same NMX Network Group. For each group of NSGs with the same NMX Network Group, NMX creates a unique map. To define NMX Network Group, Device Information Section on page 19. To export NSGs configuration to NMX 1. Verify that the MCT database you wish to export is open. 2. Click MCT button. 3. Select Export > Export to NMX template. The MCT to NMX dialog box appears: 4. By default you may export all network groups. If no, select Single Network Group and select the network group for exporting. 5. Click Export. 6. Once the procedure is complete and the (database name).tpt file is created, a message appears notifying you that the procedure is complete. NOTE: When you export a network group, each network group has its own.tpt file. 7. In NMX, in Network View tab, right click a site and select Create Network Group from Template. The Create Network Group from Template dialog opens. 8. In Advanced, select Use Original Values. 9. Select Use Local Template File and navigate to the required.tpt file and open it. 10. In Object Information, in Name enter the required Network Group name. 11. Click Ok. NMX creates a Network group with all the NSG devices included in the imported template Harmonic Inc. 56 MCT Version x, Rev B

60 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Exporting Information Exporting to SDV Session Manager of BigBand Once you have configured a large number of NSG units, you may export their data to the SDV Session manager of BigBand (SBSS). MCT exports the data into a template XML file that SBSS can use. MCT creates for each device such a file, and if virtual devices are configured, a file is also created for each virtual device. To export NSGs configuration to SBSS 1. Verify that you have saved the MCT database you wish to export. 2. Select the devices that you wish to export their configuration to the SBSS file. 3. Click MCT button. 4. Select Export > Export to SBSS. The Export to SBSS dialog box appears: 5. In the Output Folder browse to the required location for placing the XML file that complies with SBSS. 6. In Settings, do the following: Number of Session per Channel - the default is 16. Enter the required number of shell sessions per channel RF Ports Admin Status - select one of the following: Device Value - RF ports status is as per the edgeqam configuration Disabled - RF ports should be disabled Enabled - RF ports should be enabled Include Virtual QAMs From - by default you can include virtual QAMs from You can indicate a range as required. Exclude Disabled QAMs - when selected, QAMs that are disabled are not included in the file 7. Click Export. For each selected device, an XML file that complies with SBSS specifications is created at the indicated location Exporting to SDV Session Manager of Cisco Once you have configured a large number of NSG units, you may export their data to the SDV Session Manager of Cisco (USRM). MCT exports the data into a template XML file that USRM can use. MCT creates for each device such a file, and if virtual devices are configured, a file is also created for each virtual device. To export NSGs configuration to USRM 2012 Harmonic Inc. 57 MCT Version x, Rev B

61 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Exporting Information 1. Verify that you have saved the MCT database you wish to export. 2. Select the devices that you wish to export their configuration to the USRM file. 3. Click MCT button. 4. Select Export > Export to USRM. The Export to USRM dialog box appears: 5. In the Output Folder browse to the required location for placing the XML file that complies with USRM. 6. In Settings, do the following: RF Ports Admin Status - select one of the following: Device Value - RF ports status is as per the edgeqam configuration Disabled - RF ports should be disabled Enabled - RF ports should be enabled Include Virtual QAMs From - by default you can include virtual QAMs from You can indicate a range as required. Exclude Disabled QAMs - when selected, QAMs that are disabled are not included in the file 7. Click Export. For each selected device, an XML file that complies with USRM specifications is created at the indicated location. Once you have configured a large number of NSG units, you may export their data to the SDV Session Manager of Cisco (USRM). MCT exports the data into a template XML file that USRM can use. MCT creates for each device such a file, and if virtual devices are configured, a file is also created for each virtual device. To export NSGs configuration to USRM 1. Verify that you have saved the MCT database you wish to export. 2. Select the devices that you wish to export their configuration to the USRM file. 3. Click MCT button. 4. Select Export > Export to USRM Exporting Device Uptime You can export the device uptime to a.csv Excel file. Device uptime indicates the time the device is up and running since the last reboot. The exported information includes the following parameters: NSG ETH1 IP 2012 Harmonic Inc. 58 MCT Version x, Rev B

62 Chapter 3 MCT Basics RF Module Redundancy NSG Name NSG SW version NSG Uptime (Years:Days:Hours:Minutes) To export NSGs uptime 1. Select the devices that you wish to export their uptime. 2. Click MCT button. 3. Select Export > Export Uptime Data to CSV Excel file. The Action dialog opens. 4. Click on Information to view the location of the CSV file The default path is: C\Program Files\Harmonic\MCT\MCT xx.xx\data\db\uptime Export. Action dialog Click Information View information 5. To view the CSV file, navigate to it according to the indicated path and double click the CSV file RF Module Redundancy 2012 Harmonic Inc. 59 MCT Version x, Rev B

63 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Distributing Alarms Configuration to Multiple NSGs See 6.6 RF Module Redundancy on page Distributing Alarms Configuration to Multiple NSGs Distributing Alarms Settings allows to send the alarm settings of a selected NSG device to other NSG devices. To distribute alarm settings 1. Do either of the following: To distribute settings to devices of a specific site only, in the Navigation pane, select the required site. To distribute settings to devices of other sites, in the Navigation pane, select the root node of the sites tree. 2. In Device Information, select the device whose alarm settings you want to distribute to other devices in your system. The Alarm Settings button is enabled. 3. On the Home tab, in Distribute Files group, click Alarms Settings. The Distribute Alarms Settings dialog appears. It is populated with NSG devices according to your selecting in the Navigation pane: Site 1 is selected and the Distribute Alarms dialog is populated with Site 1 devices only. MCT tree is selected and the Distribute Alarms dialog is populated with the devices of the MCT tree. 4. In the Distribute Alarms dialog, either click Select All to select all populated devices or select the required devices. 5. Click Alarms Settings. The Action Log dialog appears 6. Wait until Finish is enabled Creating Custom QAM Mapping File By default the Emulation Template is set to Normal. However, the following QAM mapping options are available: 2012 Harmonic Inc. 60 MCT Version x, Rev B

64 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Creating Custom QAM Mapping File NSG 9000 device may emulate the operation of other devices which require a different mapping of the QAMs. To set the required emulation mode, for NSG 9000 version 1.5 and below, see Table 4-14: Operation Mode s for NSG & Below on page 84 and for NSG 9000 version and up, see Table 5-7: VOD s - NSG x & Up on page 117. NSG G device may emulate the operation of other NSG GbE devices which require a different mapping of the QAMs. When emulating an NSG GbE, NSG G routes the UDP range to a QAM. For example UDP 0x501 is routed to QAM=1.2.1, Service ID=1. NSG G device may emulate the operation of other NSG GbE devices which require a different mapping of the QAMs. When emulating, NSG G routes the UDP range to a QAM. Routing is according to the following two methods: Normal 10/6 - according to this QAM mapping the 10MSB indicate the designated QAM-RF output and the 6LSB the output service ID. Thus, the allowed ranges are: QAM-RF , Service ID Virtualization (8/8 bits) - according to this QAM mapping the 8MSB indicate the designated QAM-RF output and the 8LSB the output service ID. Thus, the allowed ranges are: QAM-RF 0-255, Service ID There are two types of UDP mapping files: XML file - for NSG G and NSG Each Emulation Mode is defined by an XML file. Once you select an emulation mode, NSG 9000 loads the required emulation mode XML file. You can customize up to four QAM Mapping modes and export them to an XML file and when required you can import them to the device. CSV file - for NSG G. Each Emulation Mode is defined by a CSV file. Once you select an emulation mode, NSG 9000 loads the required emulation mode file. You can customize up to four QAM Mapping modes and export them to a CSV file and when required you can import them to the device. You cannot edit the UDP mapping CSV file via MCT. To define custom QAM mapping file 1. Click MCT button. 2. Click MCT Options. 3. In the Navigation pane, select Custom UDP Mapping Harmonic Inc. 61 MCT Version x, Rev B

65 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Creating Custom QAM Mapping File The following screen appears: 4. Applies to XML file only. To edit the XML file, click Edit. The Save Changes and Cancel Changes buttons are enabled. 5. Edit the XML file to create the required custom mapping document. 6. Click any of the following buttons to obtain any of the listed operations: Table 3-8: Buttons of Custom UDP Mapping page Button Import L File Export File View File Reset File Edit Allows to import the file. See Importing Customized QAM Mapping Mode File on page 63. Allows to export custom QAM Mapping modes. See Exporting Customized QAM Mapping Mode File on page 63. Allows to view the file, XML - in a browser page, CSV - as an Excel document. Allows to return to the default values. Applies to XML file only. Allows to enter changes in the XML file Harmonic Inc. 62 MCT Version x, Rev B

66 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Retrieving Licensing Information Table 3-8: Buttons of Custom UDP Mapping page Save Changes Button Cancel Changes Applies to XML file only. Allows to save the changes to the XML file Applies to XML file only. Allows to remove all changes Importing Customized QAM Mapping Mode File 1. In Custom Mapping page, click Import File. 2. Browse to the required file and click Open. The imported file appears in the pane. 3. You may apply any of the following actions listed in Table 3-8: Buttons of Custom UDP Mapping page on page Exporting Customized QAM Mapping Mode File 1. In Custom Mapping page, click Export XML File. 2. Browse to the required location. 3. Click Save Retrieving Licensing Information MCT can retrieve and display licensing records spread across different NSGs at different sites. To retrieve licensing information, MCT accesses the records of Harmonic s database and withdraws the information. To query the database, MCT uses the following parameters, depending of the License Manager you are using: When using License Manger (LM) 2.x: License pack ID - a number you received when purchasing a license. This number is used for customer authentication. The license pack ID is also called Right ID (RID). MB serial number - since licenses bound to the specific main board on which they were installed, the serial number of the device is used for retrieving licensing information. NOTE: Licensing is supported for the following versions: NSG all version except version NSG G - all versions. When using License Manager 3.x and up: User Name - License Manager username Password - License Manager password 2012 Harmonic Inc. 63 MCT Version x, Rev B

67 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Retrieving Licensing Information Understanding the Licensing Tab The Licensing tab allows to query Harmonic s database for licensing information and to view the retrieved information. Queries Legacy Authentication, LM 2.x Queries New Authentication, LM 3.x Device Information section Details section with Licensing related tabs The retrieved information is arranged in the Details section in the following tabs: Table 3-9: Licensing Related Tabs Tab Platform License Summary License Details License Packs QAM&TS Includes general information about the device that is used during the query for licensing information. Provides a summary of all the purchased licenses per device. See Table 3-10: License Summary Tab on page 66. Displays the license packs installed on the device with license type and license serial number. See Table 3-11: License Details Tab on page 67. Displays the number of bound licenses per each license pack and license type. See Table 3-12: License Packs Tab on page 68. Shows the actual active licenses per QAM. The following section instructs you on how to retrieve the licensing information using MCT. To query for licensing information 1. Select the Licensing tab Harmonic Inc. 64 MCT Version x, Rev B

68 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Retrieving Licensing Information Licensing tab is selected Legacy - enter license pack ID and execute a query Legacy - enter username and password and execute a query Select devices for querying their licenses License related tabs that are populated with information following a query 2. In Device Information, select the devices you wish to query for licensing information. Get License Pack is enabled. 3. For LM version 2.x, do the following: 1. Focus on the Legacy Authentication section. 2. In the Seed License Pack box, enter a license pack ID to authenticate your customer information. When purchasing licenses, you received a license pack ID. Enter a license pack ID to allow the query Click to execute a query 3. Click Get License Packs, to execute a query. 4. In the message that appears, click Yes. A query is sent to the Harmonic database and the related tabs in the Details section are updated with the queried information. The information relates to all license packs associated with the selected devices. Each of the following tables describes the license related tabs and their parameters. 5. For LM version 3.x and up, do the following: 1. Focus on the New Authentication section. 2. In User Name, enter your LM username. Click to execute a query Enter your LM username Enter your LM username 2012 Harmonic Inc. 65 MCT Version x, Rev B

69 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Retrieving Licensing Information 3. Click Get License Packs, to execute a query. 4. In the message that appears, click Yes License Summary Tab A query is sent to the Harmonic database and the related tabs in the Details section are updated with the queried information. The information relates to all license packs associated with the selected devices. Each of the following tables describes the license related tabs and their parameters. The License Summary tab shows the total number of installed and used licenses per device as the following table explains: Table 3-10: License Summary Tab MCT DB Site Name Device Name NSG IP MB Serial Number Installed Temp Licenses Default QAM Licenses Installed QAM Licenses Total Available QAM Licenses Installed MOTPM Licenses Installed DOCDTI Licenses Installed DOC Licenses The MCT database the device is associated with. The site the device is associated with. The name of the device. The management IP of the device. The serial number of the mother board. Since licenses are bound to the specific main board on which they were installed, licensing queries use this parameter together with the entered license pack to identify the device. The number of temporary license - all of the QAM-RF channels are operating. This license is time limited. It can be limited as follows: 14 days - default license. See Default QAM Licenses. 90 day - usually for trial or demo purposes 30 day - usually for trial or demo purposes Default licenses - 14 days license. Once you purchase the device and as soon as the device starts working it works for 14 days with all of its capabilities. This grace period of 14 days allows you to activate your licenses to guarantee device operation according to its licensed functions. Number of installed QAM licenses. The total amount of available QAM licenses. This number includes the installed and default licenses. Number of installed Motorola Privacy Mode (MOTPM) licenses. This license type allows to output TSs scrambled in the Privacy Mode encryption technology of Motorola. Number of installed DOCSIS DTI (DOCDTI) licenses. This license type allows to output DOCSIS data with DTI synchronization via the licensed QAM. Number of installed DOCSIS (DOC) licenses. This license type allows to output DOCSIS data via the licensed QAM Harmonic Inc. 66 MCT Version x, Rev B

70 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Retrieving Licensing Information Table 3-10: License Summary Tab Installed NSCR Licenses Used Temp Licenses Used QAM Licenses Used MOTPM Licenses Used DOC Licenses Used DOCDTI Licenses Used NSCR Licenses Number of installed NSCR licenses. This license type allows to output TSs via the licensed QAM using DVB scrambling. Number of active temporary licenses. Number of active QAM licenses. Number of used Motorola Privacy Mode (MOTPM) licenses. This license type allows to output TSs scrambled in the Privacy Mode encryption technology of Motorola. Number of active DOCSIS licenses. This license type allows to output DOCSIS data via the licensed QAM. Number of active DOCSIS DTI (DOCDTI) licenses. This license type allows to output DOCSIS data with DTI synchronization via the licensed QAM. Number of active NSCR licenses. This license type allows to output TSs via the licensed QAM using DVB scrambling License Details Tab The License Details tab shows per each device its licenses with the associated license pack, license type and license serial number: Table 3-11: License Details Tab MCT DB Site Name Device Name NSG IP License Pack License Type License Serial Number The MCT database the device is associated with. The site the device is associated with. The name of the device. The management IP of the device. License pack number. N/A - appears for default licenses. The type of the license: Single QAM License MOT PM per QAM A unique number to identify the license. If during the query, MCT does not find a license pack associated with a license serial number, a message appears at the end of the query Harmonic Inc. 67 MCT Version x, Rev B

71 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Authentication Tab License Packs Tab The License Packs tab shows per each device its licenses with the associated license pack, license type and the number of installed and bound licenses: NOTE: Only installed licenses have a license pack ID. Temporary and default licenses are not displayed because they do not have a license Pack ID. Table 3-12: License Packs Tab MCT DB Site Name Device Name NSG IP License Pack License Type Qty Bound The MCT database the device is associated with The site the device is associated with The name of the device The management IP of the device License pack number. N/A - appears for default licenses. The type of the license: Single QAM License MOT PM per QAM The number of installed and bound licenses. To view the number of active licenses, select the QAM&TS tab. In case of a mismatch between the number of active licenses and bound licenses, a message appears Authentication Tab The Authentication tab is available for NSG G devices only. It allows you to enter a username and password for authentication against a RADIUS server. In case you have more than one RADIUS server in your network, or username and password for various groups of NSG devices, use the Authentication tab available for each NSG G device. Once you enter a username and password via the Authentication tab, MCT saves these parameters and uses them to access the devices. You need to enter these parameters whenever you open MCT. MCT does not save the parameters to its database. NOTE: If you entered authentication details in both Authentication tab of the device and the MCT Ribbon Authentication tab, access is granted according to the details To use the Authentication tab 1. Verify that you are working in the NSG G filter Harmonic Inc. 68 MCT Version x, Rev B

72 Chapter 3 MCT Basics Authentication Tab 2. Select the Authentication tab. 3. Enter the required Username and Password. MCT uses this combination to access the devices Harmonic Inc. 69 MCT Version x, Rev B

73 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Overview Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) 4.1 Overview Configure the devices via the tabs of the Details section. The tabs and their attributes appear as per the version selected as the expected version. The following sections describe the tabs and their attributes according to the most recent available version. If you are using a previous version, some of the documented tabs and/or attributes may not be applicable. 4.2 Setting NSG Platform s Defining the Platform tab parameters is a one time procedure you should do as you start configuring the device via MCT. To set platform parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the Platform tab. 3. Configure the platform parameters as explained below: NOTE: The ETH1 IP address always comes up blank and must be configured. Table 4-1: Platform s ETH1 IP MAC Address ETH1 IP Mask Gateway This address must be unique across the MCT database since it is used for identifying the NSG device. The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG. Should be on a different subnet than ETH2. Read-only. The physical address of the NSG. The required format is 12 digits, hexadecimal with no separator characters. The subnet mask for the ETH1 port. The IP address of the default gateway in your network (if one exists) Harmonic Inc. 70 MCT Version x, Rev B

74 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports Table 4-1: Platform s ETH1 PHY Configuration The physical configuration of the physical layer (PHY). You may select either of the following options: Auto Neg - a handshake protocol used in Ethernet links. It must be selected if the other end of the Ethernet link also uses auto Negotiation. Selecting this protocol while communicating with a device that does not use it, causes communication problems. 100 BT full - sets the speed to 100 BT and communication mode to full duplex. 10 BT full - sets the speed to 10 BT and communication mode to full duplex. 100 BT half - sets the speed to 100 BT and communication mode to half duplex. 10 BT half - sets the speed to 10 BT and communication mode to half duplex. ETH2 Enable Check to enable the ETH2 port (NSG 8108 and NSG 9000 version 1.5 and below) ETH2 IP ETH2 IP Mask ETH2 PHY Configuration Serial Number Boot Version The IP address of the ETH2 port of the NSG, which is used for conditional access. The subnet mask for the ETH2 port. The physical configuration of the physical layer (PHY). You may select either of the options described in ETH1 PHY Configuration section. Read only. The serial number of the chassis. Read only. The BOOT version currently installed. 4.3 Configuring Input Ports Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 8108 on page Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9116 on page Configuring the Input Ports of NSG & Below on page Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 8108 This configuration includes the following: Defining the GbE input port and its channels Defining the ASI input ports Configuring GbE Input Ports in NSG In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the GbE tab Harmonic Inc. 71 MCT Version x, Rev B

75 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports 3. Configure the parameters as explained below: Table 4-2: GbE Port s for NSG 8108 NSG IP GbE No. Port Enable IP Address IP Mask IP Gateway Route Refresh Unidirectional UDAD Login Password UDAD Administrator Password Force Management IP Switch Management IP Displays the IP address of ETH1. Displays the number of the active port. Check the box to enable the port. If you clear the box, the port does not admit input even if the other parameters are configured properly. The IP address of the port. The IP mask of the port. The IP address of the gateway. If checked, the NSG routinely sends "Ping" requests to the gateway of the GbE port. Requests are sent approximately once per 10 seconds, thus preventing expiration of the route. Defines the communication type between the GbE port and the switch. Select one of the following: None - the communication with the switch is via the TCP-IP protocol. UDAD - the UDAD (Unidirectional Autodiscovery) is active. The UDAD sends a communication message to the switch via the management LAN. The switch returns its communication via the GbE network. Refer below for UDAD Configuration field information. UDLR - the UDLR (Uni Directional Link Routing Protocol) is active. The UDLR sends a communication message to the switch via the management LAN. The switch returns its communication via the GbE network. The appropriate password that opens the communication between the switch and NSG. The default password is cisco. The password for entering the switch configuration. The default password is cisco. If checked, the NSG will use specified switch management IP rather than looking for that address in the packet received from the switch. The IP address that the NSG uses to communicate with the GbE switch Harmonic Inc. 72 MCT Version x, Rev B

76 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports Table 4-2: GbE Port s for NSG 8108 Redundancy Mode Active Port Select one of the following: Disabled - select this option in case your NSGs have only their GbE-1 channel connected and setup for service. This will eliminate irrelevant alarms originating in the non-active channel. Manual - you should manually select the active channel. In case that the currently active channel fails, you need to switch to the backup channel. Automatic - In case that the currently active channel fails, the NSG will automatically switch to the backup channel, to ensure continuity of service. Relevant in case of a GbE port with two channels. If you select Automatic Redundancy, the Active Port control is disabled and NSG controls which channel is active. 4. To define the GbE channels, click the Channels tab. 5. Define the GbE channels according to the following explanation: Table 4-3: Configuring Channels of GbE Port in NSG 8108 NSG IP GbE No. Channel No. Last in Chain Auto Negotiation Displays the IP address of ETH1. (Read Only.) Displays the GbE port of the channel. (Read only.) The number of the GbE port. This option applies for each GbE channel separately. Check this option, if the relevant channel is last in its chain. In case several NSGs are cascaded, select this option for the last channel on the chain so it does not send traffic back to the GbE switch. Note: Do not select this option for a GbE channel that is not last in chain, or all the NSG devices downstream from it will not be able to receive any data over their GbE ports. Controls (for each GbE channel separately) whether Auto Negotiation is activated. Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol used in GbE links. Check this option if the other end of the GbE link (typically a GbE switch) also uses Auto Negotiation. Otherwise, the box must be cleared. Activating Auto Negotiation while communicating with a device that does not use it causes communication problems Configuring the Input ASI Ports of NSG In Details, select the ASI Input tab. 2. In the ASI page, a row of information appears for each ASI port. 3. Configure the ports as explained below: 2012 Harmonic Inc. 73 MCT Version x, Rev B

77 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports Table 4-4: s of ASI Ports of NSG 8108 NSG IP ASI In No. Port Enable (Read Only) The IP address of the NSG. (Read Only) The number of the ASI input port. Select to enable the port ASI Input Port NSG Configuring Switching Range Use the Switching tab to direct programs from the input port through which they arrive to a specific output TS. Programs are routed in ranges - each range representing a group of programs that all arrive from the same input port and go to the same output TS. Switching is irrelevant to GbE input ports. Programs arriving through GbE input ports have their routing information embedded into them. To configure the switching range 1. Select the Switching tab. 2. Configure the parameters according to the following explanation: Table 4-5: Switching s NSG IP Range No Input From Program To Program Output 1-8 (Read Only) Displays the IP address of ETH1. (Read Only) Assigned automatically. Enter the required input port. Enter the first program ID of the program range. Enter the last program ID of the program range. Check the box that corresponds to the transport stream over which you want to output the indicated range of programs. One input range can leave the NSG on one transport stream only Harmonic Inc. 74 MCT Version x, Rev B

78 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports Configuring the Input Ports of NSG 9116 Two rows appear for each NSG Configure the relevant fields for each GbE port. The following fields and their explanation refer to both Cascading and Switching mode unless else is indicated. 1. In Details, select the GbE tab. 2. Enter the required values according to the following provided information: Table 4-6: GbE Port s for NSG 9116 NSG IP GbE No. Port Enable IP Address IP Mask IP Gateway Second IP Address Route Refresh Displays the IP address of ETH1. Displays the number of the active port. Switching mode - each GbE port has its own row and both ports are active. Check the box to enable the port. If you clear the box, the port does not admit input even if the other parameters are configured properly. Switching mode - Check the box for each port to enable both ports. The IP address of the port. The IP mask of the port. The IP address of the gateway. Relevant to NSG 9116 in Cascading and Bitmap UDP scheme. The second IP address of the port is required for the service routing information and belongs to the same subnet as the first IP address. If a service is output via QAM 9-16, associate the UDP port with the second IP Address to indicate QAM For example, if you assign the port IP address and 2nd IP address , the UDP together with the IP address directs the TS to QAM 1-8. If you indicate the UDP with the 2nd IP address, the TS is output via QAM Cascading mode only. If checked, the NSG routinely sends "Ping" requests to the gateway of the GbE port. Requests are sent approximately once per 10 seconds, thus preventing expiration of the route Harmonic Inc. 75 MCT Version x, Rev B

79 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports Table 4-6: GbE Port s for NSG 9116 Unidirectional UDAD Login Password UDAD Administrator Password Force Management IP Switch Management IP Redundancy Mode Active Port Defines the communication type between the GbE port and the switch. Select one of the following: None - the communication with the switch is via the TCP-IP protocol. UDAD - the UDAD (Unidirectional Autodiscovery) is active. The UDAD sends a communication message to the switch via the management LAN. The switch returns its communication via the GbE network. Refer below for UDAD Configuration field information. UDLR - the UDLR (Uni Directional Link Routing Protocol) is active. The UDLR sends a communication message to the switch via the management LAN. The switch returns its communication via the GbE network. Cascading mode only. The appropriate password that opens the communication between the switch and NSG. The default password is cisco. Cascading mode only. The password for entering the switch configuration. The default password is cisco. Cascading mode only. If checked, the NSG will use specified switch management IP rather than looking for that address in the packet received from the switch. Cascading mode only. The IP address that the NSG uses to communicate with the GbE switch. Cascading mode only. Select one of the following: Disabled - select this option in case your NSGs have only their GbE-1 channel connected and setup for service. This will eliminate irrelevant alarms originating in the non-active channel. Manual - you should manually select the active channel. In case that the currently active channel fails, you need to switch to the backup channel. Automatic - In case that the currently active channel fails, the NSG will automatically switch to the backup channel, to ensure continuity of service. Cascading mode only. Relevant in case of a GbE port with two channels. If you select Automatic Redundancy, the Active Port control is disabled and NSG controls which channel is active. 3. To define the channels of the GbE port, select the Channels tab. 4. Define the GbE channels according to the following explanation: 2012 Harmonic Inc. 76 MCT Version x, Rev B

80 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Input Ports Table 4-7: Configuring Channels of GbE Port in NSG 9116 NSG IP GbE No. Channel No. Last in Chain Auto Negotiation Displays the IP address of ETH1. (Read Only.) Displays the GbE port of the channel. (Read only.) The number of the GbE port. This option applies for each GbE channel separately. Check this option, if the relevant channel is last in its chain. In case several NSGs are cascaded, select this option for the last channel on the chain so it does not send traffic back to the GbE switch. Note: Do not select this option for a GbE channel that is not last in chain, or all the NSG devices downstream from it will not be able to receive any data over their GbE ports. Switching mode - By default, last in chain is selected. Controls (for each GbE channel separately) whether Auto Negotiation is activated. Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol used in GbE links. Check this option if the other end of the GbE link (typically a GbE switch) also uses Auto Negotiation. Otherwise, the box must be cleared. Activating Auto Negotiation while communicating with a device that does not use it causes communication problems Configuring the Input Ports of NSG & Below The NSG 9000 is furnished with three GbE input ports. To configure the NSG 9000 GbE ports 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the GbE tab. 3. Enter the required values according to the following provided information: Table 4-8: GbE Port s for NSG & Below NSG IP GbE No. Port Enable IP Address Displays the IP address of ETH1. Displays the number of the active port. Switching mode - each GbE port has its own row and both ports are active. Check the box to enable the port. If you clear the box, the port does not admit input even if the other parameters are configured properly. Switching mode - Check the box for each port to enable both ports. The IP address of the GbE 1 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected QAM mapping mode Harmonic Inc. 77 MCT Version x, Rev B

81 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode s Table 4-8: GbE Port s for NSG & Below IP Mask IP Gateway IP Address 2 IP Address 3 Route Refresh Auto Negotiation NGOD Input Group Name Active Port Enable Forwarding Destination Port The IP mask of the port. The IP address of the gateway. The IP address of the GbE 2 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected QAM mapping mode. The IP address of the GbE 3 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected QAM mapping mode. Cascading mode only. If checked, the NSG routinely sends "Ping" requests to the gateway of the GbE port. Requests are sent approximately once per 10 seconds, thus preventing expiration of the route. Controls (for each GbE channel separately) whether Auto Negotiation is activated. Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol used in GbE links. Check this option if the other end of the GbE link (typically a GbE switch) also uses Auto Negotiation. Otherwise, the box must be cleared. Activating Auto Negotiation while communicating with a device that does not use it causes communication problems. Enter the name of the input group according to the D6 standard. Select either of the following: SFP - for an optical fiber RJ45 - for a copper cable Select to allow NSG 9000 to duplicate the incoming content of this GbE port to the GbE port that is defined as a mirroring port in Destination Port. Select the mirroring port. Connect the mirroring port to devices that accept GbE input such as an MPEG analyzer. For cabling instructions, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware guide 4.4 Configuring Operation Mode s The Operation Mode allows you flexibility and optimal device utilization. It allows you to set general parameters to the output stream. To define operation mode parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the Operation Mode tab. 3. Define the required parameters as explained below: NSG Table 4-9, Operation mode parameters of NSG 8108, on page 79 NSG Table 4-10, Operation Mode s for NSG 9116, on page Harmonic Inc. 78 MCT Version x, Rev B

82 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode s NSG Table 4-14, Operation Mode s for NSG & Below, on page 84 Table 4-9: Operation mode parameters of NSG 8108 NSG IP Encryption Mode Encoding Mode PID Remapping From PID (Hex) To PID (Hex) PAT Interval PMT Interval Preclude Broadcast Review only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Select either of the following: DVB Scrambling - standard scrambling method PM Scrambling - Motorola s scrambling method Defines one of the following QAM encoding modes: Annex-A (DVB) - this mode is used mainly in European and Asian countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 8 MHz per QAM-RF channel. Annex-B - this is the mode used in North-American countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel. Annex-C (Japan) - as implied by its name, used mainly in Japan. Similar to Annex-A in the most part, but utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel. You may choose either the Paradigm (e.g. set formula) or the Random options to govern the method elementary streams are remapped and transmitted. The chosen option will take affect only after resetting the NSG. See, PID Remapping Options on page 85. Available only when Random is selected. This is the lower limit of the PID range and is written in hexa-decimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0. Available only when Random is selected. This is the upper limit of the PID range and is written in hexa-decimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0. Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams. Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams. The allowed range is ms. The value chosen must be divisible by 66 and if not, the NSG will round up or down to the closest divisible decimal value. To block management port. The port does not receive broadcast in port level Harmonic Inc. 79 MCT Version x, Rev B

83 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode s Table 4-9: Operation mode parameters of NSG 8108 Motorola Pre-encryption Only for Privacy Mode Max. Stream per TS Block TS Oversubscription Max Utilization UDP Port Scheme CAS Enable NTP Enabled NTP IP Address Local Time Offset Disable GbE Alarm - MPEG Sync Loss Disable GbE Alarm - No Valid MPEG Stream Input If checked, the NSG handles all incoming content as if it was pre-encrypted using Motorola encryption equipment. All encryption-related information is passed as is to the NSG's output. This handling should not damage nonencrypted content, so you can leave this box checked without ramifications. The maximum number of elementary streams per transport streams. service per output. When enabled the NSG blocks incoming services that surpass the Max. Stream per TS you define. The maximum number of transport streams possible. The scheme according to which the UDP Port (a 2-byte number) carries the service routing information See UDP Port Scheme on page 86. Enables or disables the encryption option. In order to fully enable this option, you should reboot the NSG device. Note: this parameter is enabled when Encryption Mode is DVB Scrambling. See also Table 3-7, Get and Send Limitations, on page 55. Select to synchronize the NSG time with the Universal Time Coordination (UTC) by connecting to an NTP (Network Time Protocol) server. If you enable this option, you cannot set the time of the unit manually. Enter the IP address of the NTP server Select the required local time offset to match between the time of the device, or UTC time and the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). You may disable this alarm. The alarm indicates that no valid MPEG data is found in the GbE traffic. You may disable this alarm. The alarm indicates that the data received through the GbE port is not a valid MPEG stream. Typically, the GbE stream does not contain a PAT. Table 4-10: Operation Mode s for NSG 9116 NSG IP Encryption Mode Review only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Select either of the following: DVB Scrambling - standard encryption method PM Scrambling - Motorola s encryption method 2012 Harmonic Inc. 80 MCT Version x, Rev B

84 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode s Table 4-10: Operation Mode s for NSG 9116 Scrambling Mode GbE Mode QAM Mapping Mode Encoding Mode CAS Enabled PID Remapping Select either of the following scrambling methods: DES DVB You may choose either the Cascading or the Switching option to govern the traffic between chained NSG 9116 units. Note: changing the GbE Mode applies after sending configuration to device and device reboot. Cascading - an advanced cabling scheme that chains any number of NSGs together. Each NSG device draws the services intended for it and passes on the traffic so a total one Gigabit is used. Switching - an advanced cabling scheme that chains two NSG 9116 units to a third NSG 9116 unit. Each of the two units receives another GbE input stream and draws the services intended for it. Each unit passes on the traffic to a different GbE port of the third NSG 9116 unit so a total of one GbE is used. Note: If Switching is selected, Multicast is disabled. See Table 4-13 on page 84. Arranges the QAM channels in relation to RF ports in either of the following options: Normal - For QAM channels mapping, see Table 4-11 on page For QAM channels mapping, see Table 4-12 on page 83. Defines one of the following QAM encoding modes: Annex-A (DVB) - this mode is used mainly in European and Asian countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 8 MHz per QAM-RF channel. Annex-B - this is the mode used in North-American countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel. Annex-C (Japan) - as implied by its name, used mainly in Japan. Similar to Annex-A in the most part, but utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel. Enables or disables the encryption option. In order to fully enable this option, you should reboot the NSG device. Note: this parameter is enabled when Encryption Mode is DVB Scrambling. See also Table 3-7: Get and Send Limitations on page 55. You may choose either the Paradigm (e.g. set formula) or the Random options to govern the method elementary streams are remapped and transmitted. The chosen option will take affect only after resetting the NSG. See, PID Remapping Options on page Harmonic Inc. 81 MCT Version x, Rev B

85 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode s Table 4-10: Operation Mode s for NSG 9116 From PID (Hex) To PID (Hex) PAT Interval PMT Interval Motorola Preencryption Max. Stream per TS Block TS Oversubscription Max Utilization Limit UDP Port Scheme NTP Enabled NTP IP Address Local Time Offset Create SAT Available only when Random is selected. This is the lower limit of the PID range and is written in hexadecimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0. Available only when Random is selected. This is the upper limit of the PID range and is written in hexadecimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0. Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams. Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams. The allowed range is ms. The value chosen must be divisible by 66 and if not, the NSG will round up or down to the closest divisible decimal value. If checked, the NSG handles all incoming content as if it was pre-encrypted using Motorola encryption equipment. All encryption-related information is passed as is to the NSG's output. This handling should not damage non-encrypted content, so you can leave this box checked without ramifications. The maximum number of elementary streams per transport streams. When enabled the NSG blocks incoming services that surpass the Max. Stream per TS you define. The maximum number of transport streams possible. The scheme according to which the UDP Port (a 2-byte number) carries the service routing information. See UDP Port Scheme on page 86. Select to synchronize the NSG time with the Universal Time Coordination (UTC) by connecting to an NTP (Network Time Protocol) server. If you enable this option, you cannot set the time of the unit manually. Enter the IP address of the NTP server Select the required local time offset to match between the time of the device, that is UTC time and the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). When enabled an SDT (Service Description Table) is added to the output stream and the Serv. Area parameter (included in the TS page) is sent to the NSG Harmonic Inc. 82 MCT Version x, Rev B

86 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode s Table 4-10: Operation Mode s for NSG 9116 Disable GbE Alarm - MPEG Sync Loss Disable GbE Alarm - No Valid MPEG Stream Input You may disable this alarm. The alarm indicates that no valid MPEG data is found in the GbE traffic. You may disable this alarm. The alarm indicates that the data received through the GbE port is not a valid MPEG stream. Table 4-11: Normal - QAM Channel Mapping RF Port QAM Channel 1 1,2 2 3,4 3 5,6 4 7,8 5 9, , , ,16 Table 4-12: QAM Channel Mapping RF Port QAM Channel 1 1,5 2 2,6 3 3,7 4 4,8 5 1,5 6 2,6 7 3,7 8 4, Harmonic Inc. 83 MCT Version x, Rev B

87 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode s Table 4-13: GbE Mode & UDP Port Scheme GbE Mode & Scheme TS GbE IP Address QAM Output Switching 1-8 different input 9-16 different input First Second Cascading & Bitmap 1-8 same input 9-16 same input First second Cascading & Encoded 1-16 Enabled port 1-16 Table 4-14: Operation Mode s for NSG & Below NSG IP QAM Mapping Mode Encoding Mode PID Remapping From PID (Hex) To PID (Hex) PAT Interval Review only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. By default the QAM Mapping Mode is set to Normal. In this case, each RF-QAM port accommodates up to four channel. However, the NSG 9000 device may emulate the operation of other devices which require a different mapping of the QAMs. For detailed information on the QAM Mapping, see the NSG 9000 Software User s Guide. Defines one of the following QAM encoding modes: Annex-A (DVB) - this mode is used mainly in European and Asian countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 8 MHz per QAM-RF channel. Annex-B - this is the mode used in North-American countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel. Annex-C (Japan) - as implied by its name, used mainly in Japan. Similar to Annex-A in the most part, but utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel. You may choose either the Paradigm (e.g. set formula) or the Random options to govern the method elementary streams are remapped and transmitted. The chosen option will take affect only after resetting the NSG. See, PID Remapping Options on page 85. Available only when Random is selected. This is the lower limit of the PID range and is written in hexa-decimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0. Available only when Random is selected. This is the upper limit of the PID range and is written in hexa-decimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0. Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams Harmonic Inc. 84 MCT Version x, Rev B

88 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Operation Mode s Table 4-14: Operation Mode s for NSG & Below PMT Interval DTI Card Exist Use DTI Clock NTP Enabled NTP IP Address Local Time Offset Encryption Mode Application Mode Symbol Rate 1 Symbol Rate 2 Interleaver 1 Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PMT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams. The allowed range is ms. The value chosen must be divisible by 66 and if not, the NSG will round up or down to the closest divisible decimal value. When selected indicates whether a DTI card is installed in the device. This is a read-only parameter. Check to use the DTI clock. You can select the Use DTI clock parameter only if there is a DTI card, that is, DTI CARD Exist parameter is checked. Select this box to synchronize device time with UTC. Enter the NTP IP address. To set the local time according to the Universal Time Coordination (UTC), select the required time offset. Select either of the following: DVB Scrambling - standard scrambling method PM Scrambling - Motorola s scrambling method Select either of the following application modes: VOD\SDV - the default option. The NSG 9000 device is operating as an integral part of a Video On Demand or Switched Digital Video network and the required parameters for this application are enabled. M-CMTS - The NSG 9000 device is operating as an integral part of an M-CMTS application and its QAMs serve for both VOD narrowcast and DOCSIS. The rate of QAM symbols that are encoded and transmitted per second. NSG 9000 has two optional Sym rates, set the required rate for this option. The rate of QAM symbols that are encoded and transmitted per second. NSG 9000 has two optional Sym rates, set the required rate for this option. An advanced QAM configuration parameter. For Annex-A or Annex-C, use For Annex-B, Interleaver value depends on the constellation in use. NSG 9000 has two optional Interleaver values, set the required value for this interleaver. Interleaver 2 See Interleaver 1. Force IGMPv2 Defines the GbE management protocol to IGMPv2 only. NSG 9000 ignores IGMPv3 messages and does not generate IGMPv3 messages PID Remapping Options Select either of the following PID remapping options: 2012 Harmonic Inc. 85 MCT Version x, Rev B

89 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output s Paradigm - a set formula. The elementary streams are selected from a predefined hexadecimal formula for PMT, Video 1&2, and ECM. For details, see below. Random - instructs the NSG to remap incoming PIDs to PID numbers that are randomly selected from a predefined range. When choosing the paradigm option a service ID will be chosen from a predefined hexadecimal formula and the ID of the PMT, Video, Audio 1&2 and ECM PIDs are derived from the service ID as follows: Table 4-15: Paradigm Option Formula Service ID = 0xN PMT PID = LeftShit (N)=0xNO PCR=Video=PMT+1=0x N1 Audio 1&2 = PMT+ 4/5=0xN 4, 0xN5 ECM=PMT+9=0xN9 Example Service ID = 0x34 PMT PID = 0x340 Video = 0x341 Audio 1&2= 0x344, 0x345 ECM PID=0x349 NOTE: The Paradigm mode is not suitable for processing services with service IDs greater than 255. If you are using service ID that are greater than 255 you must use the Random mode UDP Port Scheme The scheme according to which the UDP Port (a 2-byte number) carries the service routing information. Select either of the following schemes: Bitmap- each of the MSB bits represents an Output TS of the NSG. The Output TS is determined by the bit that is set to 1. For example, TS 8 is represented by , TS 3 by and TS 9 by together with the 2nd IP address. The 2nd IP address is relevant in Cascading and Bitmap UDP scheme. The second IP address of the port required for the service routing information. If the service is output via QAM 9-16, associate the UDP port with the second IP address to indicate QAM Encoded - the Output TS is determined by the numeric value of the MSB. For example, TS 8 is represented by , TS 3 by and TS 9 by Configuring Output s For detailed explanation, see: NSG 8108 Table 4-16, NSG 8108 TS Out s, on page 87 NSG 9116 Table 4-17, NSG 9116 TS Out s, on page 89 NSG 9000 Table 4-18, NSG 9000 TS Out s 1.5 & Below, on page Harmonic Inc. 86 MCT Version x, Rev B

90 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output s Configuring the TS Out in NSG 8108 and 9116 For each platform record, MCT creates up to eight (NSG 8108)/ sixteen (NSG 911xx) transport stream rows under the TS tab. Each row corresponds to one transport stream. The streams are automatically numbered 1 through the number of TSs in the TS ID column. Configure the output ports and signals for each stream of the NSG. You must first select a channel bandwidth and then set the other parameters. To define the out TS parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the TS tab. 3. Define the parameters as explained in the following table. Table 4-16: NSG 8108 TS Out s NSG IP QAM Reference Number Serv. Area Displays the IP address of ETH1. Each device has 4xRF ports. Each RF port facilitates 2xQAM channels. This field indicates an index number of the QAM channels from 1-8. RF port outputs the QAM channels as follows: RF port 1 outputs QAM reference number 1, 5 RF port 2 outputs QAM reference number 2, 6 RF port 3 outputs QAM reference number 3, 7 RF port 4 outputs QAM reference number 4, 8 Indicates the area this transport stream serves. This value is provided by the vendor and may help you when exporting this database to NMX template. Once you export this database to NMX template, you can monitor the serving area and generate statistical reports. TS ID The ID number of the Transport Stream ranging from 1- > This ID serves in the PAT (Program Allocation Table) of the given TS, to comply with the DVB standard. EIA Channel The default entry. It indicates the channel number for the RF as defined in the EIA standard. When N/A appears, it indicates that the RF frequency defined in RF Freq does not comply with the frequencies defined by the EIA Harmonic Inc. 87 MCT Version x, Rev B

91 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output s Table 4-16: NSG 8108 TS Out s RF Freq. (Hz) RF Power Level (dbmv) Constellation Symbol Rate (Msps) Data Rate (Bps) Interleaver Spectral Inversion QAM-IF On By default, indicates the RF frequency according to the EIA channel number configured in EIA Freq. However, you can define a required frequency for the RF carrier of this TS, and then N/A appears in EIA Freq. The entered frequency should be divisible by 100. Due to the NSG's dual-upconverter architecture, TSs are actually grouped in pairs as listed in QAM Reference Number. When the RF Frequency of a TS is set to F1, the frequency of its paired TS is automatically set to be (F1-Channel_Bandwidth). For example, if you use Channel Bandwidth of 6Mhz and you set the RF Frequency of TS number 1 to 512,000,000 Hz, then the RF Frequency of TS number 5 will be set to 506,000,000 Hz. The RF power level in dbmv. When you change the power level of a stream (for example, of stream 1), the power level of its associated stream (for example, stream 5) is automatically updated accordingly. You can specify numbers that contain a decimal digit as well (for example, 50.5). Valid values are: Annex-A - QAM16, QAM32, QAM64, QAM128, QAM256 Annex-B - QAM64, QAM256 Annex-C - QAM16, QAM32, QAM64, QAM128, QAM256 This is the rate of QAM symbols encoded into the RF signal. Higher symbol rate implies higher rate of delivered data and requires high-quality HFC network infrastructure. (Read-Only) The bit rate of the transport stream. The data rate value changes according to the value of Constellation and Symbol Rate parameters. The Interleaver settings determine the robustness of the QAM signal to transmission errors. Recommended values are: ANNEX-A and ANNEX C: ANNEX-B, Constellation 64: ANNEX-B, Constellation 256: If checked, spectral inversion is enabled By default QAM-IF On is selected and the port is open. To close the IF output port of a specific transport stream, clear the box Harmonic Inc. 88 MCT Version x, Rev B

92 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output s Table 4-16: NSG 8108 TS Out s RF On If checked, opens the RF output of a pair of transport streams unless. Clear the box to close the outputs. Transport stream output is enabled only if both the IF and Port Enable boxes are checked. Table 4-17: NSG 9116 TS Out s NSG IP QAM Reference Number GbE IP Serv. Area Displays the IP address of ETH1. The number of QAM channels. Each device has 8xRF ports. Each RF port facilitates 2xQAM channels. This field indicates an index number of the QAM channels from RF port outputs the QAM channels as follows: RF port 1 outputs QAM reference number 1, 2 RF port 2 outputs QAM reference number 3, 4 RF port 3 outputs QAM reference number 5, 6 RF port 4 outputs QAM reference number 7, 8 RF port 5 outputs QAM reference number 9, 10 RF port 6 outputs QAM reference number 11, 12 RF port 7 outputs QAM reference number 13, 14 RF port 8 outputs QAM reference number 15, 16 Indicates The GbE IP address facilitating the data that is output via the QAMs related to this IP address. Indicates the area this transport stream serves. This value is provided by the vendor and may help you when exporting this database to NMX template. Once you export this database to NMX template, you can monitor the serving area and generate statistical reports. TS ID The ID number of the Transport Stream ranging from 1- > This ID serves in the PAT (Program Allocation Table) of the given TS, to comply with the DVB standard. EIA Channel The default entry. It indicates the channel number for the RF as defined in the EIA standard. When N/A appears, it indicates that the RF frequency defined in RF Freq does not comply with the frequencies defined by the EIA Harmonic Inc. 89 MCT Version x, Rev B

93 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output s Table 4-17: NSG 9116 TS Out s RF Freq. (Hz) RF Power Level (dbmv) Constellation Symbol Rate (Msps) Data Rate (Bps) Interleaver Spectral Inversion QAM-IF On RF On By default, indicates the RF frequency according to the EIA channel number configured in EIA Freq. However, you can define a required frequency for the RF carrier of this TS, and then N/A appears in EIA Freq. The entered frequency should be divisible by 100. Due to the NSG's dual-upconverter architecture, TSs are actually grouped in pairs as listed in QAM Reference Number. When the RF Frequency of a TS is set to F1, the frequency of its paired TS is automatically set to be (F1-Channel_Bandwidth). For example, if you use Channel Bandwidth of 6Mhz and you set the RF Frequency of TS number 1 to 512,000,000 Hz, then the RF Frequency of TS number 2 will be set to 506,000,000 Hz. The RF power level in dbmv. When you change the power level of a stream (for example, of stream 1), the power level of its associated stream (for example, stream 5) is automatically updated accordingly. You can specify numbers that contain a decimal digit as well (for example, 50.5). Valid values are: Annex-A - QAM16, QAM32, QAM64, QAM128, QAM256 Annex-B - QAM64, QAM256 Annex-C - QAM16, QAM32, QAM64, QAM128, QAM256 This is the rate of QAM symbols encoded into the RF signal. Higher symbol rate implies higher rate of delivered data and requires high-quality HFC network infrastructure. (Read-Only) The bit rate of the transport stream. The data rate value changes according to the value of Constellation and Symbol Rate parameters. The Interleaver settings determine the robustness of the QAM signal to transmission errors. Recommended values are: ANNEX-A and ANNEX C: ANNEX-B, Constellation 64: ANNEX-B, Constellation 256: If checked, spectral inversion is enabled. By default QAM-IF On is selected and the port is open. To close the IF output port of a specific transport stream, clear the box. If checked, opens the RF output of a pair of transport streams. Clear the box to close the outputs. Transport stream output is enabled only if both the IF and Port Enable boxes are checked Harmonic Inc. 90 MCT Version x, Rev B

94 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output s Configuring TS Out in NSG & Below For each NSG 9000 platform record, MCT creates up to 72 transport stream rows under the TS tab. Each row corresponds to one transport stream. The number of output streams is license dependent. If the RF mode is DUAL only two QAM channels are active and only two streams are outputted once a license is granted. MCT allocates for each port a maximum of four index numbers for the TS IDs. For example, if only two ports are active in the first slot, the TS IDs are 1, 2 and TS IDs 3 & 4 are reserved for when all four channels of the port are active. In the same way TS IDs 7 & 8 are reserved for when in slot two all four channels of the port are active. Configure the output ports and signals for each stream of each NSG. You must first select a channel bandwidth and then set the other parameters. To define the out TS parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the QAM & TS tab. 3. Define the parameters as explained in the following table. Table 4-18: NSG 9000 TS Out s 1.5 & Below Field NSG IP Slot Number Port Number QAM Mode QAM Index Displays the IP address of ETH1. Displays the number of the slots from 1-9. For slots arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware User s Guide. (Read only) Each QAM-RF module has two ports. This field indicates the QAM-RF port number. For QAM-RF port arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware User s Guide. The QAM mode defines the number of active QAM channels. Upon changing the amount of active channels, all values of RF parameters turn to their default values. The available options are as follows: SINGLE - only one active QAM channel DUAL - two active QAM channels QUAD - four active QAM channel. Numbers of QAM channels in a sequential order from (Basically there are up to 72 output TSs). Along this range, select the required QAM channel. The channels are available according to the defined No. of channels. For example, if the No. of Channels is defined as Triple in slot 1 the available QAM channels are 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 and 7. QAM port 4 and 8 are inactive. You cannot change their No. of channels and their frequency is set to Harmonic Inc. 91 MCT Version x, Rev B

95 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output s Table 4-18: NSG 9000 TS Out s 1.5 & Below Field Serv. Area Indicates the area this transport stream serves. This value is provided by the vendor and may help you when exporting this database to NMX template. Once you export this database to NMX template, you can monitor the serving area and generate statistical reports. TS ID The ID number of the Transport Stream ranging from 1- > This ID serves in the PAT (Program Allocation Table) of the given TS, to comply with the DVB standard. EIA Channel RF Freq. (Hz) RF Power Level Constellation Symbol Rate (Msps) Interleaver Spectral Inversion QAM-IF On The default entry. It indicates the channel number for the RF as defined in the EIA standard. When N/A appears, it indicates that the RF frequency defined in RF Freq does not comply with the frequencies defined by the EIA. By default, indicates the RF frequency according to the EIA channel number configured in EIA Freq. You can define another required frequency and then N/A appears in EIA Freq. The entered frequency should be divisible by 100. The RF power level in dbmv. When you change the power level of a stream (for example, of stream 1), the power level of its associated stream (for example, stream 5) is automatically updated accordingly. You can specify numbers that contain a decimal digit as well (for example, 50.5). Valid values are: Annex-A - QAM16, QAM32, QAM64, QAM128, QAM256 Annex-B - QAM64, QAM256 Annex-C - QAM16, QAM32, QAM64, QAM128, QAM256 This is the rate of QAM symbols encoded into the RF signal. Higher symbol rate implies higher rate of delivered data and requires high-quality HFC network infrastructure. The Interleaver settings determine the robustness of the QAM signal to transmission errors. Recommended values are: ANNEX-A and ANNEX C: ANNEX-B, Constellation 64: ANNEX-B, Constellation 256: If checked, spectral inversion is enabled By default QAM-IF On is selected and the port is open. To close the IF output port of a specific transport stream, clear the box Harmonic Inc. 92 MCT Version x, Rev B

96 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output s Table 4-18: NSG 9000 TS Out s 1.5 & Below Field Port Enable QAM License PM License NSCR License DOCDTI License DOC License Input Source NGOD QAM Group Name DOCSIS Sync Compensation If checked, opens the RF output of a pair of transport streams unless it is a module of SINGLE. Clear the box to close the outputs. Transport stream output is enabled only if both the IF and Port Enable boxes are checked. Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a QAM license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM license was requested and granted. Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a PM license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM license was requested and granted. Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a NSCR license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM license was requested and granted. Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a DOCDTI license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM license was requested and granted. Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a DOC license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM license was requested and granted. (Relevant when QAM Mapping Mode is other than Normal.) This filed displays the input port and IP address that is provisioned to this QAM. Enter the QAM group name according to the D6 standard. To fine-tune the sync offset across cable interfaces, use the DOCSIS Sync Compensation option. The sync offset units are ticks of the CMTS MHz clock, where 1 tick=97.6 nano-sec. The typical allowed offset difference between modems is +/- 6 ticks. To define sync offset value: 1. Measure the average Cable Modem (CM) timing offset difference. You can view the timing offset values via the CMTS console. 2. Define the cable interface to be compensated. For Network routing configuration, see 4.7 Configuring Network Routing s on page Multicast (NSG 8108 and 9116) To fully utilize the bandwidth dedicated to Video On Demand, you may configure the NSG to broadcast switch broadcast applications or services other than VOD Harmonic Inc. 93 MCT Version x, Rev B

97 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Output s NOTE: Verify that in Operation Mode > GbE Mode, Cascading is selected. To define multicast parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required NSG device(s). 2. In Details, select the Multicast tab. On the Home tab, in the Editor group, Add is enabled. The Add button is enabled as long as the Detailed section and the Multicast tab are selected. 3. Click Add. A record is added. 4. Define the multicast parameters as follows: Table 4-19: Multicast s NSG 8108 and 9116 NSG IP Multicast No Multicast Address Remapped Service ID UDP Port Outputs (Read only) The IP address of the device. (Read only) An index number. Type in the multicast address. Type in the output service ID. Type in the required UDP port. Select a QAM to output the service. NSG 8108 facilitates also two ASI input ports. For NSG 9116, in Switching mode, two rows of information appear for each GbE port Routing a Socket (Sessions) - NSG & Below To allow an efficient use of the allocated bandwidth and apply the Switched Broadcast technology, use the Session page to multicast incoming services as explained below: Sessions configured via the MCT are static services. That is, the services have a permanent configuration. The configuration is saved on the NVRAM and once you reboot the device, the configuration of the service is reloaded. To route a socket 1. Verify that the Application Mode is VOD\SDV (Select Operation Mode tab > Application Mode. 2. Select the Sessions tab. 3. In the Sessions page, define the parameters as explained below: Table 4-20: Session s - NSG & Below NSG IP Read only. Indicates the IP address of the NSG Harmonic Inc. 94 MCT Version x, Rev B

98 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Defining NGOD s Table 4-20: Session s - NSG & Below Session ID Input GbE Port Number Multicast IP\GbE IP Port Input UDP Port Read only. A sequential number to indicate the session ID as it appears in the current page. When working in standalone mode, session ID starts at 10,000 and you can configure up to 100 sessions only. When managing the device via a network management system, you can configure up to 1000 sessions. Indicates the number of the input port. Enter either a multicast IP address or the IP address of the GbE port selected in Input GbE Port Number. Enter the depi-remote-id as appears in CMTS console. Output QAM Number Enter the QAM-RF channel number (1-72). Socket Pass Through Service ID Source IP Select to allow socket output without any changes, that is without remapping and without generating tables. When this option is selected all services in the socket are outputted via the selected output port and the Service ID option is disabled. Indicates the service at the output port. When selected new tables are generated at output. Indicates the IP address of the broadcasting source. 4.6 Defining NGOD s To allow communication with the ERM, the NSG device supports the D6 and R6 Next Generation On Demand (NGOD) protocols. When communicating using the R6 protocol NSG is always listening on port 554(RTSP). To configure NGOD and ERM parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select NGOD tab. 3. Define the NGOD and ERM parameters as explained below: For NSG 9116, see Table 4-21, NGOD s NSG 9116, on page 95 For NSG & below, see Table 5-17, NGOD s NSG x & Up, on page 128. (NGOD parameters are the same for the various NSG 9000 versions.) Table 4-21: NGOD s NSG 9116 NSG IP StreamingZone ComponentName Read only. Indicates the IP address of the NSG. Enter the streaming zone as defined in the D6 protocol. Enter the component name as defined in the D6 protocol Harmonic Inc. 95 MCT Version x, Rev B

99 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring Network Routing s Table 4-21: NGOD s NSG 9116 Bandwidth Update Threshold Cost ERM Enable ERM IP Address ERM Port ERM Version Define the allowed deviation from the current output bit rate of the device. Whenever the bit rate deviation reaches the value defined in this field, the NSG sends the ERM the updated output bit rate. Enter a value as defined in the D6 protocol. Select to enable the NSG-ERM communication Enter the IP address of the ERM. Enter the number of the ERM TCP port Select the supported version of the protocol. NSG supports version 2 which is the default version. 4.7 Configuring Network Routing s Once you add an NSG device, five blank routing records appear in the Routing tab for each GbE port. Define routing records when you need the NSG to communicate with components, such as CAS, that are not included in the NSG's subnet. The Routing tab allows you to define routing records for the ETH2 port of each NSG. You can define up to five routing IP addresses for each NSG. To configure network route parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the Routing tab. 3. Configure the required parameters as explained below: Table 4-22: Network Routing s NSG IP Routing No. Active Destination Mask Gateway Displays the IP address of ETH1. An index number for each GbE port that is allocated automatically. Select to activate the route. To deactivate the route, de-select the. Once you activate the route, you can set its parameters. Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the IP address of the destination device. Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the subnet mask. Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway must be in the same subnet as the NSG ETH2 port. 4. Click Save Harmonic Inc. 96 MCT Version x, Rev B

100 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Configuring SNMP Managers and Community 4.8 Configuring SNMP Managers and Community As soon as you add an NSG in the Platform tab, four SNMP manager records appear in the following tabs: NSG 8108 and SNMP Manager tab and SNMP Community tab NSG SNMP tab Configuring SNMP s for NSG 8108 and 9116 To configure the SNMP traps destination 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the SNMP Managers SNMP tab. 3. To configure SNMP Traps Destinations, define the parameters as follows: Table 4-23: SNMP Manager tab parameters NSG IP Manager No. Active Manager IP Address The IP address of the NSG. A consecutive number of the SNMP Manager. Each NSG has up to four managers. Check to activate the SNMP trap. Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the IP address of the computer to forward to SNMP traps. 4. Click Save. To configure SNMP community 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the SNMP Community tab. 1. Define the parameters as follows: Table 4-24: SNMP Community NSG IP Get Community Set Community Trap Community The IP address of the NSG. The name of the community having read access. It will respond to the Get commands. The default field entry is public. The name of the community having write access. It will respond to the Set commands. The default field entry is private. The name of the community to which traps are sent. The default field entry is public. 2. Click Save Harmonic Inc. 97 MCT Version x, Rev B

101 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Generating Access Control List (ACL) Configuring SNMP - NSG & Below 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the SNMP tab. 3. Define the parameters as follows: Table 4-25: SNMP Tab for NSG & Below NSG IP Get Community Set Community Trap Community Host 1 IP Address Host 1 Version Enable Host 1 The IP address of the NSG. The name of the community having read access. It will respond to the Get commands. The default field entry is public. The name of the community having write access. It will respond to the Set commands. The default field entry is private. The name of the community to which traps are sent. The default field entry is public. Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG. Open the Version list and select the required SNMP version. Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG. NOTE: You can define up to four hosts. 4.9 Generating Access Control List (ACL) To control the access of other network devices to the NSG 9000 device, you can create either of the following lists of network devices: Network devices with permission to communicate with the EdgeQAM Network devices that are prohibited from communicating with the EdgeQAM. To generate ACL 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the Operation Mode tab. 3. Select Enable ACL. 4. Select the required ACL Mode: Exclude - To create a list of network devices that are prohibited from communicating with the device. Include - To create a list of network devices that are allowed to communicate with the device Harmonic Inc. 98 MCT Version x, Rev B

102 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Generating Access Control List (ACL) 5. Select the Access Control List tab. The Add button is enabled. 6. Click Add to add a blank row. 7. Configure the parameters as explained below: Table 4-26: ACL s NSG IP Address Enable ACL ACL Mode Index IP Address IP Mask The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG. Read only. ACL feature is enabled once you enabled it in the Operation Mode tab. Read only. Configuration is as defined via the Operation Mode tab. Exclude - To create a list of network devices that are prohibited from communicating with the device. Include - To create a list of network devices that are allowed to communicate with the device. Read only. A sequential number of the devices listed in the excluded/included list. Enter the IP address of the source device, that is the device to communicate or to be banned from communicating with the device. Enter the required IP mask. You can allow/block a group of network devices to communicate with the device Harmonic Inc. 99 MCT Version x, Rev B

103 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS) 4.10 Conditional Access System (CAS) The Conditional Access System (CAS) prevents unauthorized viewing of programs by scrambling services that later on can be decrypted using the correct decrypting key. NSG devices support the following CAS modes: DVB CAS - An encryption mode for the DVB protocol. Privacy Mode - An encryption mode developed by Motorola Inc. This section guides you on how to define the CAS parameters via MCT for both CAS systems Configuring DVB CAS DVB-CAS is applied in the following two options: Tier-based encryption - all VOD sessions are encrypted using a single ECM. Session-based encryption - every VOD session is encrypted using a dedicated control word, and requires its own ECM. All NSG models support both DVB-CAS options. Some of the DVB-CAS configuration parameters apply to both modes, while other parameters are relevant only to one of the modes Configuring the EIS s To encrypt services, NSG needs to communicate with an external EIS (Event Information Scheduler) that typically is part of the video server. Through the EIS page you set the basic operation and communication parameters for EIS. NOTE: When the CAS Enabled option is disabled all changes to CAS parameters are not sent to the device. To set EIS attributes 1. Select the DVB-CAS tab. 2. Configure the parameters as explained below: NSG 8108 and Table 4-27, EIS s (NSG 8108 & 9116), on page 100 NSG Table 4-28, EIS s (NSG & Below), on page 101 Table 4-27: EIS s (NSG 8108 & 9116) NSG IP Static AC EIS Port CP Duration (sec). (Read only) Indicates the IP address of the NSG. When selected, all services are scrambled with the same control word and ECM PID. The TCP port through which NSG communicates with the EIS. Valid values range between The Crypto Period (in seconds). The NSG changes the control word (or "key") for encrypted services every X seconds, as indicated here. Valid values range between Harmonic Inc. 100 MCT Version x, Rev B

104 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS) Table 4-27: EIS s (NSG 8108 & 9116) CA Desc Clear Time on AC Change ECM PID Super CAS ID (Hex) Access Criteria TS ID Provisioning Allows you to select a location in the PMT for the CA descriptor. The CA descriptor may appear either in a service or elementary level or in both levels. The clear time in seconds due to the change of Access Criteria. This field indicates the allowed period of time without any active access criteria. Valid values range between The default value is 20 seconds. If Static AC is checked, enter the ECM PID for scrambling with it all the services. If Static AC is checked, enter the Super CAD ID of the ECMG as provided by the vendor. If Static AC is checked, enter access criteria as provided by the vendor. Indicates the provisioned output in either of the following options: Direct - The provisioned TS ID is the same as the output TS ID. By Output Number - The default option. Indicates the provisioned output according to the QAM number that is a number between 1-8. Numbers higher than 8 are read according to the 1-8 sequence. For example, the number 9 means output 1 and number 16 means output 8. The following table lists the EIS s. It includes the following parameter types: parameters that are relevant to both modes - no specific indication in the table parameters that are relevant only for tier-based - specific indication in the table parameters that are relevant only for session-based - specific indication in the table Table 4-28: EIS s (NSG & Below) NSG IP CAS Enabled EIS>SCS Port Number (Read only) Indicates the IP address of the NSG. Select this box to enable the CAS to allow the service to be encrypted. If you change CAS parameters and the CAS is disabled, changes are not sent to the device. Enabled when in Session based mode. Defines the TCP port through which NSG communicates with the EIS. Valid values range between Harmonic Inc. 101 MCT Version x, Rev B

105 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS) Table 4-28: EIS s (NSG & Below) CP Duration (sec). CA Desc Clear to Scramble (sec) Tier based ECM PID SuperCAS ID Access Criteria TS ID Provisioning Block Upon Failure Fail to Scramble Timeout (Sec) ECMG Failure Retries The Crypto Period (in seconds). The NSG changes the control word (or "key") for encrypted services every X seconds, as indicated here. Valid values range between Allows you to select a location in the PMT for the CA descriptor. The CA descriptor may appear either in a service or elementary level or in both levels. The clear time in seconds before starting to scramble the service once the SCG is received. Valid values range between The default value is 0 seconds. The default DVB scrambling mode is Session based. To change it to Tier based, select this box. When selected all services are scrambled with the same control word and ECM and there is no external EIS. Once selected, the DVB Tier Based parameters are enabled: If Tier-based is checked, enter the ECM PID for scrambling with it all the services. If Tier-based is checked, enter the SuperCADS ID of the ECMG as provided by the vendor. Enter access criteria as provided by the vendor. Indicates the provisioned output in either of the following options: Direct - The provisioned TS ID is the same as the output TS ID. By Output Number - The default option. Indicates the provisioned output according to the QAM number that is a number between Note: This parameter is relevant when working in Sessions based. If Tier based is checked, this parameter is enabled. Check this parameter to allow the device to block the stream to protect the content. When a stream is blocked, no picture appears on the end user screen. This action takes place in case the NSG 9000 could not establish communication with the ECMG. If Tier based is selected, define the period of time between outputting the service and activating the Block Upon Failure feature. Define the number of times the NSG 9000 unit tries to establish communication with the Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG) before issuing the alarm ECMG Connection Failure Harmonic Inc. 102 MCT Version x, Rev B

106 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS) Defining the ECMG s ECMG (Entitlement Control Message Generator) parameters specify communication between the ECM generator and the NSG. Each row in the page represents an ECMG. You can define up to five ten ECMGs. If multiple ECMGs are available, the NSG tries to connect to one of them starting from the first ECMG defined in this page. If the connection fails, the NSG tries to connect to the next defined ECMG. After connecting to an ECMG, the status of the subsequent devices on the list remains Disconnected. If the NSG fails to connect to all ECMGs, the system issues the ECMG connection failure alarm. To set ECMG attributes 1. Select the ECMG tab. 2. Configure the parameters as explained in the following table: Table 4-29: ECMG s NSG IP ECMG No. Active Name Read only. Indicates the IP of the device. An index number that indicates the sequential number of the ECMG. The NSG tries to connect to the ECMGs according to their order. Check to activate the ECMG. Once you check it you can define the ECMG parameters. Enter the brand name of the ECMG. Super CAS ID A 32-bit hexadecimal number that consists of the 16-bit CA vendor ID and an additional 16-bit number that distinguishes one ECM generator from another for the same CAS vendor. The super CAS ID determines which access criteria is coupled with each ECMG. The CAS vendor provides this value. Protocol Revision Specifies the CAS mode of operation. Select Revision 1 or 2 for SimulCrypt Ver. 1 or 2 respectively. IP Address The IP address of the ECMG. The CAS vendor provides this value. Port Channel ID The number (in decimal format) of the TCP port used to connect the ECMG. The CAS vendor provides this value. A unique numeric value that identifies an NSG specific to the ECMG Privacy Mode Privacy Mode allows NSG to encrypt the Video-on-Demand content that is flowing through it. In PM-enabled systems, NSG devices are grouped into VODS (Video On Demand System.) Each VODS is accessed by a specific VODS ID and password defined in the Privacy Mode tab Harmonic Inc. 103 MCT Version x, Rev B

107 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS) Each VODS is assigned with its own unique ECMs which are generated randomly by the ERS. The ERS sends the MCT application a time indication for checking whether the ECM was changed (callback) and an ERS Synch Number to notify of a possible change of ECM. The MCT application checks at each indicated callback time whether the Sync Number has changed and once a change is detected the MCT application updates all NSGs of the VODS. To allow an accurate ECM update, set the MCT computer time according to either of the following: NTP server - install NTP client on MCT computer. The NTP client is not provided by Harmonic Inc. Local network time service - consult your IT personnel. Table 4-30: Privacy Mode Terminology Term Callback ERS ERS Synch Number VOD A UTC time indication at which the MCT application is requested to connect with the ERS to check whether the ERS Synch Number has changed. A change in this number indicates the generation of a new ECM. Encryption Renewal Server the MCT connects to. When the ERS Synch Number changes, a new ECM is generated. All NSGs of the VODS should be updated with the new ECM. Video On Demand System. NOTE: Prior to configuring the PM parameters, verify that CAS is enabled Configuring PM Global s To effectively utilize the Privacy Mode, you must ensure that it is configured according to your specific requirements. Use the Privacy Mode tab to set Privacy Mode global parameters Managing the ECMs The ECMs are updated either automatically or manually. You can also remove all ECMs from the selected NSGs Harmonic Inc. 104 MCT Version x, Rev B

108 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS) Automatically - The MCT application automatically connects to the ERS according to the last callback and checks whether the ERS Synch Number was changed. Once it was changed, the MCT sends the new ECM to the NSGs of the relevant VODS. If it fails to communicate with an NSG, it attempts to connect to it every whole hour and to update the ECM. In addition, upon a restart of the MCT computer, the MCT automatically checks for changes of the callback and ERS Synch Number and updates the NSGs as required. Manually - Once you click Update ECM, the MCT application connects to the ERS and if the ERS Synch Number was changed the MCT sends the new ECM to the NSGs of the relevant VODS. Purge ECMs - allows to remove all ECMs from the selected NSGs. To enable automatic ECM update 1. On Privacy Mode tab, in Options group select Auto ECM Update option. Select to allow auto ECM update The MCT application automatically connects to the ERS according to the last callback and checks whether the ERS Synch Number was changed. To update the ECM manually In case Automatic ECM Update is not checked and you wish to update the ECM, do the following: 1. Select the NSGs you want to update their ECMs. 2. On Privacy Mode tab, in ECM group, click Update ECM. The Action Log dialog appears 3. Wait until Finish is enabled. To purge ECMs 1. Select the NSGs you want to update their ECMs. 2. On Privacy Mode tab, in ECM group, click Purge ECM. The Action Log dialog appears 3. Wait until Finish is enabled and all ECMs are removed from the selected NSGs Defining ERS General s Define ERS general parameters via Privacy Mode tab, Options group: To define ERS parameters 1. Verify that ERS Type is defined as Production. The default type is Production and the Development type is for debug purposes only. 2. To define the type of ECM request that is sent to the ERS, open the Cipher Type list and select either of the following options: 2012 Harmonic Inc. 105 MCT Version x, Rev B

109 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS) DES - a request to generate an ECM that matches the DES scrambling method, usually used in north America. DVB - a request to generate an ECM that matches DVB and its scrambling method, usually used in Europe Defining ERS Communication s Define the ERS communication parameters via Privacy Mode tab, ERS Communication group. 1. To define the callback, enter in ERS Query Interval the required time indication in milliseconds. The default value is 10000msec. 2. To define the timeout upon an HTTPS request, enter in ERS HTTPS Request Timeout the required time indication in milliseconds. The default value is 30000msec. 3. To check the ERS status, copy into your browser the ERS URL indicated in ERS Server URL and view the ERS status Managing the VODS Manage your VODS via Privacy Mode tab, VODS group: To select VODS Open the ID list and select the required VODS Adding/Removing VODS NSGs may belong to different VODS who are defined by a unique ID and password. To identify each VODS, enter a unique VODS ID and password. To add VODS 1. Click Add. The ADD VODS dialog appears: 2. Enter the VODS ID and password Harmonic Inc. 106 MCT Version x, Rev B

110 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS) 3. To complete this procedure, you should validate the VODS ID and password. To validate, click Verify. You are asked to wait while the ERS checks the VODS ID and password. If the VODS details are invalid, an error message appears. You should retry to add the VODS. If the VODS details are validated, the following message appears: 4. In the Add VODS dialog, click Add to add the VODS to the VODS list. VODS are listed with either of the following: Green check mark - indicates that the VODS details are verified by the ERS. Red X - indicates that the VODS details are invalid and the ERS did not approve the ID and password.. VODS details are approved by the ERS VODS details are not approved by the ERS To remove VODS 1. Open the ID list and select the required VODS to be removed. 2. Click Remove. The required VODS is removed from the ID list Harmonic Inc. 107 MCT Version x, Rev B

111 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS) Changing VODS Password 1. Click Change Password. 2. Enter the new password. 3. Click OK Testing VODS ERS Communication 1. Open the ID list and select the required VODS. 2. Click Test. A message appears notifying whether the VODS selected in the ID list communicated with the ERS, and of the callback name and ERS Sync. 3. Click Ok Monitoring Privacy Mode Operation of a Specific VODS 1. Open the ID list and select the required VODS. 2. To view the log, click View Log. 3. To remove all previous records from log, click Clear Log Configuring Privacy Mode s per NSG Defining Privacy Mode s 1. Select the Privacy Mode tab. 2. Configure the parameters as explained in the following table: Table 4-31: Privacy Mode s NSG IP Enable Clear To Scramble Transition (sec) VODS ID The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG. Select to enable encryption. Enter the clear time in seconds before starting to scramble the service, once an ECM is received. Valid values range between The default value is 3 seconds. The unique ID of the VODS the NSG belongs to Harmonic Inc. 108 MCT Version x, Rev B

112 Chapter 4 Configuring - NSG 8108, 9116 & G (1.5 & Below) Conditional Access System (CAS) Table 4-31: Privacy Mode s Warning - ECM Expiration Date (days) Alarm - ECM Expiration Date (days) ERS Synch Number ECM Next Callback Date Last ECM Update Date Stream Processing on ECM Expiration The NSG issues a warning if the number of days that have passed since the expiration of the current callback is larger than the value indicated in this field. The NSG issues an alarm if the number of days that have passed since the expiration of the current callback is larger than the value indicated in this field. View only. The current ERS Synch Number. When this number changes, a new ECM is generated. The next time the MCT application needs to check whether a new ECM was generated. The last time the NSG was updated with a new ECM or callback. Open the Stream Processing on ECM Expiration list and select either of the following: Scramble with Last ECM - All NSGs of the VODS should be updated with the new ECM. Don t Scramble - do not scramble the stream Harmonic Inc. 109 MCT Version x, Rev B

113 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Overview Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up 5.1 Overview NOTE: The configuration of NSG 9000 devices running with firmware version 1.5 and up is described in a separate chapter because version 1.5 consists of different configuration logic. and incorporated major changes. Configure the devices via the tabs of the Details section. The tabs and their attributes appear as per the version selected as the expected version. The following sections describe the tabs and their attributes according to the most recent available version. 5.2 Setting NSG Platform s Defining the Platform tab parameters is a one time procedure you should do as you start configuring the device via MCT. To set platform parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Device Details, select the Platform tab. 3. Define the parameters as explained below: Table 5-1: Platform s NSG x & Up ETH1 Boot Version MB FPGA Version MB Serial Number Chassis Serial Number Force IGMPv2 DTI Card Exist Use DTI Clock Read only. Displays the IP address of the currently configured Eth1 port. The BOOT flash version of the device. The version of the FPGA firmware loaded onto the main board. The serial number of the main board The serial number of the chassis. To set the GbE management to support the IGMPv2 protocol only, select Force IGMP V2. NSG 9000 ignores any IGMPv3 messages and does not generate any IGMPv3 messages. Read only. Indicates whether a DTI card is mounted. This field is updated after performing Get From Device. Select to enslave NSG 9000 clock to the DTI clock Harmonic Inc. 110 MCT Version x, Rev B

114 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Management Port Table 5-1: Platform s NSG x & Up DTI Redundancy Mode DTI Selected Port To set the DTI port redundancy mode, open the Redundancy Mode list and select one of the following: Manual - you need to select the DTI port. No automatic switching/activation of ports is done, regardless of the status of the DTI ports. Automatic (no Auto Revert) - selecting the active port is completely automatic, without any intervention and without any preference of a specific port. If the active port fails, the standby port is activated and assumes the role of "active" as long as it is in normal state. If the latter fails, ports will be switched again. This switching can continue any number of times, without any preference of a specific port. Automatic (Auto Revert) - in this mode, the selected port (as defined in Selected Port) is always preferred over the other port. In case that the selected port fails, the standby port is automatically activated. Once the selected port is fixed, the NSG automatically switches back to the selected port. To select the active DTI port, open the Selected Port list and select either port 1 or 2. The Selected Port list is disabled if Automatic (no Auto Revert) is selected. 5.3 Configuring Management Port The IP address of the ETH ports or NSG 9000 primary IP address is configured as part of the NSG 9000 installation. However, when required, you may change the IP address settings. NOTE: Configure the IP address of ETH1 on a different subnet than that of ETH2. Configuring both ports to be on the same subnet may result in serious network communication problems. NSG 9000 uses the ETH1 port to communicate with the network for management purposes and ETH2 for Conditional Access Systems (CAS) purposes. To change configuration of ETH1 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Device Details, select the Management tab. 3. Define the parameters as explained below: Table 5-2: Eth1 s NSG x & Up NSG IP Eth1 IP Read only. Displays the IP address of the currently configured Eth1 port. Enter a new IP address for Eth1. Once you send it to the device the NSG IP field is updated accordingly Harmonic Inc. 111 MCT Version x, Rev B

115 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Management Port Table 5-2: Eth1 s NSG x & Up MAC Address Eth1 Mask Gateway Eth1 PHY Configuration Enable Eth2 Eth2 IP Eth2 IP Mask Read only. View the MAC address of the device. Enter the Mask address of the Eth1 port Enter the IP address of Eth1 gateway To define the physical layers of the Ethernet communication, open the Ethernet list and select one of the following: Auto Neg - The Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol used in GbE links. Select this check box to activate the Auto Negotiation protocol only if the other end of the GbE link also uses auto negotiation. 100 BT full - sets the speed to 100 BT and communication mode to full duplex. 10 BT full - sets the speed to 10 BT and communication mode to full duplex. 100 BT half - sets the speed to 100 BT and communication mode to half duplex. 10 BT half - sets the speed to 10 BT and communication mode to half duplex. Click to enable Eth2 Enter Eth2 IP address Enter Eth2 Mask address Eth2 PHY Configuration Open the list and define the physical layer of the Eth 2 communication as explained in Eth1 PHY. Enable ACL ACL Mode Click to enable Access Control List (ACL). To control the access of other network devices to the NSG 9000 device, create either of the following lists of network devices: Network devices with permission to communicate with the EdgeQAM Network devices that are prohibited from communicating with the EdgeQAM. See, 5.15 Generating Access Control List (ACL) on page 131. Select either of the following: Exclude - To create a list of network devices that are prohibited from communicating with the device. Include - To create a list of network devices that are allowed to communicate with the device Configuring the Input Ports of NSG x & Up The NSG 9000 is furnished with three GbE input ports. To configure the NSG 9000 GbE ports 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the GbE tab Harmonic Inc. 112 MCT Version x, Rev B

116 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Management Port 3. Enter the required values according to the following provided information: Table 5-3: GbE Port s for NSG x & Up NSG IP GbE No. Port Enable IP Address IP Mask IP Gateway IP Address 2 IP Address 3 Route Refresh Auto Negotiation NGOD Input Group Name Active Port Port Redundancy Displays the IP address of ETH1. Displays the number of the active port. Switching mode - each GbE port has its own row and both ports are active. Check the box to enable the port. If you clear the box, the port does not admit input even if the other parameters are configured properly. Switching mode - Check the box for each port to enable both ports. The IP address of the GbE 1 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected QAM mapping mode. The IP mask of the port. The IP address of the gateway. The IP address of the GbE 2 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected QAM mapping mode. The IP address of the GbE 3 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected QAM mapping mode. If checked, the NSG routinely sends "Ping" requests to the gateway of the GbE port. Requests are sent approximately once per 10 seconds, thus preventing expiration of the route. Controls (for each GbE channel separately) whether Auto Negotiation is activated. Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol used in GbE links. Check this option if the other end of the GbE link (typically a GbE switch) also uses Auto Negotiation. Otherwise, the box must be cleared. Activating Auto Negotiation while communicating with a device that does not use it causes communication problems. Enter the name of the input group according to the D6 standard. Select either of the following: SFP - for an optical fiber RJ45 - for a copper cable Applies to NSG G version 1.6 and up. This version supports 1:1 port redundancy. For each input GbE port with fiber/copper SFP, you can define a backup port with copper RJ-45 connector. The backup port backs up one primary port only. To enable port redundancy, select the required port. The parameters of the backup port are disabled. You can enable port redundancy only if the port is enabled. You can disable a port only if port redundancy is disabled Harmonic Inc. 113 MCT Version x, Rev B

117 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Management Port Table 5-3: GbE Port s for NSG x & Up Enable Forwarding Destination Port Select to allow NSG 9000 to duplicate the incoming content of this GbE port to the GbE port that is defined as a mirroring port in Destination Port. Select the mirroring port. Connect the mirroring port to devices that accept GbE input such as an MPEG analyzer. For cabling instructions, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware guide RF Module Tab Once you read information from the device, the RF Module tab updates to display information about each slot and the installed module. Thus, some of the parameters of the RF Module tab are read only. You can also define global RF module parameters. To view and configure RF module parameters 1. Read information from the device (Select the device and click Get from Device.) 2. Select the RF Module tab. 3. View/configure the following information: Table 5-4: RF Module tab - NSG 1.5.x & Up NSG IP Slot No. Actual Card Displays the IP address of ETH1. Displays the slot in of the RF module, usually a number between 1-9. Indicates the actual module type. See Table 5-5: Module Type on page 115. Expected Card Indicates the configured module type. See Table 5-5: Module Type on page 115. Annex Select the required ITU-T Annex: Annex-A (DVB) - this mode is used mainly in European and Asian countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 8 MHz per QAM-RF channel. Annex-B - this is the mode used in North-American countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel. Annex-C (Japan) as implied by its name, used mainly in Japan. Similar to Annex-A in the most part, but utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel Harmonic Inc. 114 MCT Version x, Rev B

118 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Management Port Table 5-4: RF Module tab - NSG 1.5.x & Up Constellation Symbol Rate Interleaver 1 To define the required constellation, open the Constellation list. The Constellation is the type of Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) used. QAM constellation affects Data Rate and Symbol Rate, and must be set according to HFC network properties. Valid values are: Annex-A or Annex-C 16, 32, 64, 128, 256 Annex-B 64 and 256 Define/view the rate of QAM symbols that are encoded and transmitted per second. You can define the symbol rate in Annex A and C. In Annex B, you can only view its value. View the interleaver values as defined in the QAM tab. NSG 9000 has two optional Interleaver values, set the required value for this interleaver. Interleaver 2 See Interleaver 1. QAM Placement RF Template Relevant to QAM OCTAL only. See QAM Placement on page 115. Select the required EIA type: EIS-STD - frequency is defined using channel numbers based on the EIA-STD channel table. See EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps on page 208. EIA-HRC - RF settings are entered using channel numbers based on the EIA-HRC channel table. See EIA SDT and HRC Standards on page 117. Table 5-5: Module Type Module Type NSG-2R NSG-2R1G NSG-8R1G QUAD, up to four QAM-RF channels per RF port QUAD, up to four QAM-RF channels per RF port. Channels frequency is between MHz. OCTAL, up to eight QAM-RF channels per RF port. Currently only four QAM-RF channels are supported QAM Placement NOTE: Relevant to QAM-RF module NSG-8R1G only. The QAM Placement feature allows you to configure the QAM-RF channels as follows: Block - standard placement of adjacent QAM-RFs, depending on the selected ITU-T Annex Harmonic Inc. 115 MCT Version x, Rev B

119 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Redundancy s Per QAM - you can place each individual QAM anywhere within the 48Mhz block as long as the following conditions are met: QAM placement prevents out-of-block configurations. QAM placement should not surpass the 48Mhz block. The order of the frequencies is from lowest to highest. No overlapping frequencies (according to the symbol rate). The bandwidth range of each signal does not overlap the bandwidth range of its adjacent signal. The QAMs frequency steps of RF port 1 and RF port 2 are identical. If QAM frequencies of RF port 1 are as follows: 500, 506, 515Mhz, offset of +6 and +15 from the lowest, then the frequencies of RF port 2 should be, for example, as follows: 600, 606, 615. Switching from Block to Per QAM Verify that the number of QAM-RF channels is identical in both ports. When changing from Block to Per QAM, the previously defined frequencies appear and you can change them as required. When changing from Per QAM to Block, the default frequencies appear according to the defined ITU-T Annex. 5.4 Configuring Redundancy s NSG 9000 supports edge cluster technology. This technology offers high availability obtained by 1:1 device redundancy. The active and standby devices are configured the same and are provisioned with the same sessions. However, the output ports of the standby device are disabled. Both the active and standby device communicate with each other via their Eth1 and Eth2 ports. See NSG 9000 Software User s Guide. To configure edge cluster parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. Select the Edge Cluster tab. 3. Configure the edge cluster parameters as explained below: Table 5-6: Redundancy s Eth1 IP Device Redundancy Mode Eth1 Peer IP Eth2 Peer IP Read only. The IP address of the Eth1 port. Select one of the following modes: Mute - all of the QAM-RF channels are mute Edge Cluster - the device operates in a redundancy mode StandAlone - the device operates in a stand alone mode Enter the IP address of the Eth1 port of the peer device Enter the IP address of the Eth2 port of the peer device 5.5 Configuring VOD s Configure VOD parameters when the NSG 9000 device serves as a highly integrated digital video gateway, capable of multiplexing on-demand content streamed over an IP network. To configure VOD parameters 2012 Harmonic Inc. 116 MCT Version x, Rev B

120 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring VOD s 1. In device Information, select the required device 2. In Details, select the VOD tab. 3. Configure the parameters as explained below: Table 5-7: VOD s - NSG x & Up NSG IP Encryption Mode Emulation Template PID Remapping From PID (Hex) To PID (Hex) PAT Interval PMT Interval Update PMT Version Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Select either of the following: DVB Scrambling - standard scrambling method PM Scrambling - Motorola s scrambling method The Emulation Template, previously known as QAM Mapping Mode is set by default to Normal. In this case, each RF-QAM port accommodates up to four channel. However, the NSG 9000 device may emulate the operation of other devices which require a different mapping of the QAMs. For detailed information on the QAM Mapping, see the NSG 9000 Software User s Guide. You may choose either the Paradigm (e.g. set formula) or the Random options to govern the method elementary streams are remapped and transmitted. The chosen option will take affect only after resetting the NSG. See, PID Remapping Options on page 85. Available only when Random is selected. This is the lower limit of the PID range and is written in hexa-decimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0. Available only when Random is selected. This is the upper limit of the PID range and is written in hexadecimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0. Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams. Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams. The allowed range is ms. The value chosen must be divisible by 66 and if not, the NSG will round up or down to the closest divisible decimal value. Select Update PMT Version to update the PMT version. This version is incremented every time the PMT s data is changed (e.g. the Video PID changes) Harmonic Inc. 117 MCT Version x, Rev B

121 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring SDV Redundancy s Table 5-7: VOD s - NSG x & Up Create SAT Original Network ID (Hex) Serving Area Location in SAT Auto Detection Session Inactivity Teardown Threshold (sec) Select Create SAT (Service Area Table), to create SAT at the output. Once Create SAT is selected, the following parameters are enabled: Original Network ID Serving Area Location in SAT To create SAT, serving area should be up to16bits or up to See Table 5-11 on page 120. If Create SAT is selected, define the original network ID. If Create SAT is selected, open the Serving Area Location in SAT list and select one of the following: TS ID - the serving area is written to the TS ID. First Service Name - the serving area is written to the first service name Both - the serving area is written to both the TS ID and the first service name. Check to allow auto detected VOD sessions. Enter the allowed duration, in seconds, for session inactivity before the session is removed from the output. 5.6 Configuring SDV Redundancy s Redundancy NSG 9000 supports service redundancy that is activated once the device does not detect the service at the input port. Service redundancy is supported in either of the following methods: Hot - NSG 9000 JOINs both the primary multicast group and the backup multicast group. Both primary and backup services are at the input to allow short fail-over time. Warm - NSG 9000 JOINS the primary multicast group only. Once the device does not detect the service at the input, it JOINs the backup multicast group and the fail-over time is longer. To define SDV redundancy parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the SDV tab. 3. Configure the following parameters: Table 5-8: SDV Redundancy parameters NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH Harmonic Inc. 118 MCT Version x, Rev B

122 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring NSG 9000 and ISA SRM Communication Table 5-8: SDV Redundancy parameters NGOD Redundancy Mode Select one of the following modes: Hot/Warm - the default option. The service has only one redundant service. NSG 9000 JOINs the primary service, and upon failure, JOINs the backup multicast group. As a result, the backup service is streamed from the switch to the input port of the device. Hot/Hot - the service has one redundant service. NSG 9000 JOINs both the primary and backup multicast groups and both groups are steamed to the device. Upon failure, the device inputs the backup service resulting in a short fail-over time. Hot/Warm/Warm - the service has at least two redundant services. NSG 9000 JOINs the primary multicast group. Upon failure NSG 9000 JOINs the first backup service and as a result the backup service is streamed into the device. If this trial fails, NSG 9000 JOINs the second backup multicast group. Hot/Hot/Hot - the service has at least two redundant services. NSG 9000 JOINs all three multicast groups. All three services are streamed to the input port to allow short fail-over time. ISA Redundancy Mode See NGOD Redundancy Mode explanation. 5.7 Configuring NSG 9000 and ISA SRM Communication To receive streams provisioned by the ISA SRM set the following parameters. 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the ISA tab. 3. Configure the following parameters: Table 5-9: NSG 9000 (1.5.x & Up) and ISA SRM communication Eth1 Enable Reset Indication SRM IP Address SRM Port Connection Type Timeout Period Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. If selected, an indication is sent to the ISA server (either ERM or SRM) upon reset. Enter the IP address of the SRM server. Enter the port number over which the device communicates with the SRM. Select either TCP or UDP. Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between the NSG trials to connect to the ISA server Harmonic Inc. 119 MCT Version x, Rev B

123 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Setting Device Time and Date 5.8 Setting Device Time and Date 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the Time tab. 3. Configure the parameters as explained below: Table 5-10: Device Time s - NSG x & Up IP address Enable NTP NTP Server Address Time Zone DST Start Date SDT End Date Read Only. Displays the IP address of Eth1 port Select to allow to establish communication with the NTP server, select Enable NTP. Enter the IP address of the NTP server. Open the Time Zone list and select the required local time offset to match between the time of the device, that is UTC time, and the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). In Daylight Saving Time Start Date, enter the required date. In Daylight Saving Time End Date, enter the required date Configuring TS Out in NSG x & Up For each NSG 9000 platform record, MCT creates up to 72 transport stream rows under the TS tab. Each row corresponds to one transport stream. The number of output streams is license dependent. If the RF mode is DUAL only two QAM channels are active and only two streams are outputted once a license is granted. MCT allocates for each port a maximum of four index numbers for the TS IDs. For example, if only two ports are active in the first slot, the TS IDs are 1, 2 and TS IDs 3 & 4 are reserved for when all four channels of the port are active. In the same way TS IDs 7 & 8 are reserved for when in slot two all four channels of the port are active. Configure the output ports and signals for each stream of each NSG. You must first select a channel bandwidth and then set the other parameters. To define the out TS parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the QAM & TS tab. 3. Define the parameters as explained in the following table. Table 5-11: TS Out s - NSG x & Up Field NSG IP Slot Number Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Read only. Displays the number of the slots from 1-9. For slots arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware User s Guide Harmonic Inc. 120 MCT Version x, Rev B

124 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Setting Device Time and Date Table 5-11: TS Out s - NSG x & Up Port Number TS No. Field Read only. Each QAM-RF module has two ports. This field indicates the QAM-RF port number. For QAM-RF port arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware User s Guide. Read only. Displays the ID of the transport stream carried over this QAM-RF channel. # QAMs Per Port Select the number of active QAM channels. The number of active channels is license dependent and by default two channels are active. Following is a list of the optional number of active channels: 1 - only one active QAM channel 2 - (Default) two active QAM channels 3 - applies to Annex A only, and activates three QAM channels 4 - applies to Annex B and C only, and activates four QAM channels. Applies also to Annex A when an NSG-8R1G module is mounted and activates four QAM channels. Note: In dual, triple and quad, the frequency of the QAM channels is consecutive and each channel utilizes six or eight MHz: In ANNEX B and C - 6MHz and in ANNEX A 8MHz. QAM Index Serv. Area The numbers of the QAM channel in a sequential order from (Basically there are up to 72 output TSs). Along this range, select the required QAM channel. The channels are available according to the defined No. of channels. For example, if the No. of Channels is defined as Triple in slot 1 the available QAM channels are 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 and 7. QAM port 4 and 8 are inactive. You cannot change their No. of channels and their frequency is set to 0. Indicates the area this transport stream serves. This value is provided by the vendor and may help you when exporting this database to NMX template. Once you export this database to NMX template, you can monitor the serving area and generate statistical reports. Note: If you use Create SAT, serving area should be up to 16bits (range of ). See Table 5-7 on page 117. TS ID The ID number of the Transport Stream ranging from 1- > This ID serves in the PAT (Program Allocation Table) of the given TS, to comply with the DVB standard. QAM Manager The QAM manager determines the functionality of the QAM. The default QAM manager is NGOD ERM. You can select one of the QAM managers listed in the QAM Manager table, see Table 5-12: QAM Manager on page Harmonic Inc. 121 MCT Version x, Rev B

125 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Setting Device Time and Date Table 5-11: TS Out s - NSG x & Up Field EIA Type EIA Channel RF Freq. (Hz) Power per QAM (dbmv) Interleaver Spectral Inversion Mute QAM CW Port Enable QAM License PM License Input Source NGOD QAM Group Name Read only. Displays the EIA type as configured in the RF Module tab. The default entry. It indicates the channel number for the RF as defined in the EIA standard. When N/A appears, it indicates that the RF frequency does not comply with the frequencies defined by the EIA. By default, indicates the RF frequency according to the EIA channel number configured in EIA Freq. You can define another required frequency and then N/A appears in EIA Freq. The entered frequency should be divisible by 100. The RF power level in dbmv. When you change the power level of a stream (for example, of stream 1), the power level of its associated stream (for example, stream 5) is automatically updated accordingly. You can specify numbers that contain a decimal digit as well (for example, 50.5). The Interleaver settings determine the robustness of the QAM signal to transmission errors. Recommended values are: ANNEX-A and ANNEX C: ANNEX-B, Constellation 64: ANNEX-B, Constellation 256: If checked, spectral inversion is enabled By default the QAM is on and outputting streams. To close the QAM, check the required Mute QAM box. Select for testing purposes only. If checked, opens the RF output of a pair of transport streams unless it is a module of SINGLE. Clear the box to close the outputs. Transport stream output is enabled only if both the IF and Port Enable boxes are checked. Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a QAM license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM license was requested and granted. Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a PM license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM license was requested and granted. (Relevant when QAM Mapping Mode is other than Normal.) This filed displays the input port and IP address that is provisioned to this QAM. Enter the QAM group name according to the D6 standard Harmonic Inc. 122 MCT Version x, Rev B

126 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring Network Routing s Table 5-12: QAM Manager QAM-RF Manager VOD SRM NGOD ERM (default) ISA SRM Application VOD Service & PID Remux VOD SDV Service & PID Remux SDV VOD Service & PID Remux VOD - the NSG 9000 automatically detects the incoming streams and automatically routes them, according to the indicated UDP, to the required QAM- RF channel. The traffic routed via the QAM-RFs is controlled by the SRM (Session Resource Manager). The SRM may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID remux. The NGOD ERM controls the QAM-RFs for binding SDV sessions and for routing VOD sessions. The ERM may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID remux. All QAM-RFs send D6 messages to the NGOD ERM if NGOD ERM server is configured and enabled by selecting Applications > NGOD. All QAM-RFs are controlled by ISA (Interactive Service Architecture) using the RPC protocol. VOD sessions are provisioned via ISA or by autodetection. The ISA may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID remux. Pass Through Pass Through The incoming stream is streamed out without any changes, that is without generating new tables, services or PIDs. The traffic is locally routed (device Passthrough manager) to the QAM-RFs as indicated by the UDP port. M-CMTS M-CMTS The QAM-RFs deliver M-CMTS data and are controlled by the CMTS. D2E D2E The D2E server controls the QAMs. Future use only. NOTE: To change a QAM Manager, verify that no session, service or PID are provisioned/remuxed to this QAM-RF. 5.9 Configuring Network Routing s See 4.7 Configuring Network Routing s on page Broadcast Application In Broadcast application mode, NSG 9000 allows to route input content to any output, that is to define a session. NSG 9000 allows to create the following types of sessions: Pass through - to route complete input MPTSs by using the Pass Through tab. Service Remux - to route specific MPEG services (programs) using the Service Remux tab PID Remux - to route individual PIDs using the PID Remux tab 2012 Harmonic Inc. 123 MCT Version x, Rev B

127 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Broadcast Application NOTE: VOD application supports barker channels. A VOD session may stream out also a remuxed service or PID Defining a Passthrough Session The Pass Through option, allows to output a socket without any changes, that is without remapping and without generating tables. When this option is selected all services in the socket are outputted via the selected output port. When passing through a TS or a service, you cannot remux a service or a PID included in the pass through TS or service. In addition, you cannot multiplex other input streams to the pass through QAM Backing Up a Passthrough Session An input socket may have up to two backup input sockets. By default, the first input socket is the primary socket. If it fails, automatically the following configured socket is activated. If the active input socket is the last one in the list and it fails, the redundancy switch is performed manually only. You need to manually switch to another input socket. To configure a pass through a session NOTE: A session is defined as Pass Through during QAM&TS configuration. (See Configuring TS Out in NSG x & Up on page 120). 1. In Details, select the BCST Pass Through tab. 2. Define the parameters as explained in the table below: Table 5-13: Pass Through Session s NSG IP Session ID Source Type Enable Backup Active Multicast GbE Port No. IP Address UDP Port Source IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the number of the session in the current page. Read only. Indicates whether the session is a Primary or a Backup session. By default, the first input socket is the primary socket. Select to enable backup. The socket is automatically activated upon failure. See Backing Up a Passthrough Session on page 124. By default the primary input socket is the active one. Once backup is enabled, select the required active session. To view the currently active socket, perform Get From Device. Select to enable multicast. Enter the required input port. Enter the IP address of the selected GbE port. Enter the UDP port. Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket Harmonic Inc. 124 MCT Version x, Rev B

128 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Broadcast Application Table 5-13: Pass Through Session s Output QAM No. Read only. Indicates the output QAM, a number between Defining Service Remux Sessions You can route a service from any input to any output. You can select whether to output the service with its input ID or to remap it. When provisioning static sessions through the web client or MCT, session ID starts at 10,000 and you can configure up to 500 sessions only. NOTE: You cannot remux PIDs of remuxed services. To route a service 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the Service Remux tab. 3. Click Add. A blank row is added. 4. Define the parameters as explained below: Table 5-14: Service Remux Session NSG IP Session ID Multicast GbE Port No. IP Address UDP Port Source IP Output QAM No. Service ID PID Remap Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the number of the session in the current page. Select multicast in case the input stream is a multicast TS. Select the input GbE Port. Enter the required unicast/multicast IP address of the input port. Enter the UDP port number. Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket Enter the QAM number, a number between 1-72, to output the session. Enter the required output service ID. You can output the service with the same input ID number or to remap the service. By default, PID Remap is selected. To output a service without remapping its PIDs, de-select PID Remap. If you disable PID remapping, verify there is no PID conflict in the output Harmonic Inc. 125 MCT Version x, Rev B

129 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring M-CMTS Session Defining PID Remux You can route a PID from any input to any output. You can route up to 8 PIDs to an output, or configure up to 576 PID sessions. You can select whether to add a PMT reference to the PID. You can route an input PID to a few outputs and remap a PID to output it over different outputs. However, you cannot route a PID to the same output with different remapped PIDs. The PID 0x10 is reserved for the Network Information Table (NIT). If you remux a PID and remap it to PID 0x10, the PAT points to it as a NIT table PID. NSG 9000 ignores any of the PID 0x10 configuration such as PMT reference and a descriptor. To route a PID 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the PID Remux tab. 3. Click Add. A blank row is added. 4. Define the parameters as explained below: Table 5-15: PID Remux Session NSG IP Session ID Multicast GbE Port No. IP Address UDP Port Source IP Input PID (Hex) Output QAM No. Output PID (Hex) PMT Reference ES Type Descriptors Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the number of the session in the current page. Select multicast in case the input stream is a multicast TS. Select the input GbE Port. Enter the required unicast/multicast IP address of the input port. Enter the UDP port number. Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket To define the required PID, in Input PID, enter in hexadecimal the required input PID number. Enter the QAM number, a number between 1-72, to output the PID. Enter the output PID number in hexadecimal. You can output the PID with the same input PID number or to remap the PID. To allow PMT reference, select the PMT Ref box. If you selected the PMT Reference box, enter the ES Type to stream out the PID. This is the ES type that the PMT table points to. Enter the required parameters as defined by the MPEG standard Configuring M-CMTS Session When NSG 9000 is integrated in an M-CMTS system, do the following: 2012 Harmonic Inc. 126 MCT Version x, Rev B

130 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring M-CMTS Session Create an M-CMTS session by defining the QAM Manager as M-CMTS Configure the session - When you configure an M-CMTS session, you choose to output a socket without any changes, that is without remapping and without generating tables. To create an M-CMTS session 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the QAMs & TS tab. 3. For the required RF Output, open the QAM Manager list and select M-CMTS. A blank row appears in the M-CTS tab and you can start configuring the session. To configure an M-CMTS session 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the M-CTS tab. 3. Define the parameters as explained below. When you configure a session, select the required input port and route it to the required output as instructed below: Table 5-16: M-CMTS Session s NSG IP Session ID DTI Sync Restamping GbE Port No. DOCSIS Sync Compensation GbE IP Address Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the number of the session in the current page. Relevant to primary DS channels only - To synchronize with the DTI time, select DTI Sync Restamping. The EdgeQAM re-stamps the DTI sync packets. To define the input GbE Port, enter the GbE Port, a number between 1-3. Relevant to primary DS channels only - In DOCSIS Sync Compensation, enter the sync compensation. The CMTS core router automatically inserts DOCSIS sync packets into the primary DS QAM channels. To ensure the accuracy of the DOCSIS sync packets, the EdgeQAM re-stamps them. Depending on RF network topology, it may be required to fine-tune the sync messages that flow over the various QAM channels of the EdgeQAM. The fine-tuning ensures consistent timing of CMs across all cable interfaces of the system. To fine-tune the sync offset across cable interfaces, use the DOCSIS Sync Compensation option. The sync offset units are ticks of the CMTS MHz clock, where 1 tick=97.6 nano-sec. The typical allowed offset difference between modems is +/- 6 ticks. To define the sync compensation value, measure the average Cable Modem (CM) timing offset difference (you can view the timing offset values via the CMTS console) and calculate the desired compensation value for the QAMs of the port. Typically, the compensation value of adjacent QAMs in the port is identical for each QAM in the port. To set an offset, see Setting DOCSIS Sync Compensation Offset on page 128. Enter the IP address of the selected GbE port Harmonic Inc. 127 MCT Version x, Rev B

131 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring NGOD s - NSG x & Up Table 5-16: M-CMTS Session s L2TP Session ID Output QAM No. Enter the required session ID View the QAM number (a number between 1-72) that outputs the session. Setting DOCSIS Sync Compensation Offset 1. In the M-CMTS tab, select the required M-CMTS sessions. 2. On the Home tab, in the Editor group, click Set Bulk Offset. 3. In Bulk Offset dialog, enter the required DOCSIS sync compensation offset. 4. Click Ok. The value of DOCSIS Sync Compensation of the selected session changes according to the required offset Configuring NGOD s - NSG x & Up When the EdgeQAM is part of an NGOD system architecture, you need to configure the following to allow the QAM-RFs of the EdgeQAM to outflow SDV/VOD sessions: Configure and enable an NGOD ERM server as explained below. Define the NGOD ERM as the QAM-RF manager of the required QAM-RFs. See Configuring TS Out in NSG x & Up on page 120. To configure NGOD parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the NGOD tab. 1. Define the parameters as explained below. NOTE: To allow communication with the ERM, the NSG 9000 device supports the D6 and R6 NGOD protocols. When communicating using the R6 protocol, NSG is always listening on port 554(RTSP). Table 5-17: NGOD s NSG x & Up NSG IP Streaming Zone NGOD Component Name Bandwidth Update Threshold (kbps) Routing Cost Enable ERM (D6) Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Enter the streaming zone as defined in the D6 protocol Enter the component name as defined in the D6 protocol Define the allowed deviation from the current output bit rate of the device. Whenever the bit rate deviation reaches the value defined in this field, the NSG sends the ERM the updated output bit rate. Enter a value as defined in the D6 protocol. To enable the NSG 9000-ERM communication, select the Enable ERM (D6) box Harmonic Inc. 128 MCT Version x, Rev B

132 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring CAS s Table 5-17: NGOD s NSG x & Up ERM IP Address ERM Port ERM Version ERM Keep Alive Connection Retry Threshold Hold Time Enter the ERM IP address Enter the ERM TCP port number Select the supported version of the protocol. Version 2 is the default version. Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between the keepalive messages transmitted by the NSG to the ERM. The default is 30 seconds. Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between retrials to connect to the ERM to send D6 messages Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between responses to successive Keep Alive and or UPDATE messages received by the NSG. If the duration time elapses and a response is not received, NSG tries to re-establish the connection with the ERM Configuring CAS s For CAS configuration, see 4.10 Conditional Access System (CAS) on page 100. For Privacy Mode general overview, see Privacy Mode on page 103. For configuring Privacy Mode parameters, see following sections. To configure Privacy Mode parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the Privacy Mode tab. 3. Configure the parameters as explained below: Table 5-18: Privacy Mode s NSG IP Enable PM CAS Clear To Scramble Transition (sec) VODS ID Warning - ECM Expiration Date (days) The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG. Select to enable encryption. Clear To Scramble Transition (sec). The unique ID of the VODS the NSG belongs to. The NSG issues a warning if the number of days that have passed since the expiration of the current callback is larger than the value indicated in this field Harmonic Inc. 129 MCT Version x, Rev B

133 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Configuring SNMP s Table 5-18: Privacy Mode s Alarm - ECM Expiration Date (days) ERS Synch Number ECM Next Callback Date Last ECM Update Date Stream Processing on ECM Expiration The NSG issues an alarm if the number of days that have passed since the expiration of the current callback is larger than the value indicated in this field. View only. The current ERS Synch Number. When this number changes, a new ECM is generated. The next time the MCT application needs to check whether a new ECM was generated. The last time the NSG was updated with a new ECM or callback. Select either of the following: Scramble with Last ECM - All NSGs of the VODS should be updated with the new ECM. Don t Scramble - do not scramble the stream Configuring SNMP s The Simple Network Management Protocol allows network management systems to communicate with network elements. By default the SNMP is enabled and you may disable it when required. The SNMP table allows you to create the following: A list of SNMP managers to receive messages from network elements. Once you have accomplished that, configure the SNMP Community String. To set password like strings for the various network elements. The default string value for the Get community is public. By configuring the SNMP Community string you actually set up different SNMP managers to monitor specific groups of devices. To set SNMP parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the SNMP tab. 3. Configure the parameters as explained below: Table 5-19: SNMP s NSG IP Address Enable Contact The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG. By default SNMP is enabled. Verify that it is enabled. To disable SNMP, de-select Enable SNMP. Enter contact information 2012 Harmonic Inc. 130 MCT Version x, Rev B

134 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Generating Access Control List (ACL) Table 5-19: SNMP s Location (SysLocation) Get Community Host 1 IP Address Host 1 Version Enable Host 1 Enter the location of the device. In other words, the location of the host on which the SNMP agent, or server runs. The name of the community having Read access to the network elements. The elements will respond to this community Get commands. The default string is public. Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG. Open the Version list and select the required SNMP version. Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG. NOTE: You can define up to four hosts Generating Access Control List (ACL) To control the access of other network devices to the NSG 9000 device, you can create either of the following lists of network devices: Network devices with permission to communicate with the EdgeQAM Network devices that are prohibited from communicating with the EdgeQAM. To generate ACL 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the Management tab. 3. Select Enable ACL. 4. Select the required ACL Mode: Exclude - To create a list of network devices that are prohibited from communicating with the device. Include - To create a list of network devices that are allowed to communicate with the device. 5. Select the Access Control List tab. The Add button is enabled. 6. Click Add to add a blank row. 7. Configure the parameters as explained below: Table 5-20: ACL s NSG IP Address Enable ACL The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG. Read only. ACL feature is enabled once you enabled it in the Management tab Harmonic Inc. 131 MCT Version x, Rev B

135 Chapter 5 Configuring NSG G Version 1.5 & Up Generating Access Control List (ACL) Table 5-20: ACL s ACL Mode Index IP Address IP Mask Read only. Configuration is as defined via the Management tab. Exclude - To create a list of network devices that are prohibited from communicating with the device. Include - To create a list of network devices that are allowed to communicate with the device. Read only. A sequential number of the devices listed in the excluded/included list. Enter the IP address of the source device, that is the device to communicate or to be banned from communicating with the device. Enter the required IP mask. You can allow/block a group of network devices to communicate with the device. For licensing information, see 3.13 Retrieving Licensing Information on page Harmonic Inc. 132 MCT Version x, Rev B

136 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Overview Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G 6.1 Overview Configure the devices via the tabs of the Details section. The tabs and their attributes appear as per the version selected as the expected version. The following sections describe the tabs and their attributes according to the most recent available version. 6.2 Setting NSG Platform s on page Configuring Management Port on page Configuring the Input Ports of NSG G on page Configuring/Viewing RF Module s on page Configuring/Viewing RF Module s on page Configuring EdgeCluster s on page Configuring SDV s on page Configuring ISA-Device Communication on page Setting Device Time and Date on page Configuring TS Out s on page Configuring Network Routing s on page Configuring Broadcast s on page Configuring M-CMTS s on page Configuring NGOD s on page Configuring CAS s on page Configuring SNMP s on page Device Authentication on page Setting NSG Platform s Defining the Platform tab parameters is a one time procedure you should do as you start configuring the device via MCT. To set platform parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Device Details, select the Platform tab. 3. Define the parameters as explained below: 2012 Harmonic Inc. 133 MCT Version x, Rev B

137 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Setting NSG Platform s NOTE: In Version 2.0 only Chassis Serial Number appears. Table 6-1: Platform s NSG G ETH1 IP GbE FPGA Version MB Serial Number MB Storage Format Chassis Serial Number Force IGMPv2 DTI Card Exist Use DTI Clock DTI Redundancy Mode DTI Selected Port Enable Syslog Syslog Server IP Address Read only. Displays the IP address of the currently configured Eth1 port. The version of the FPGA firmware loaded onto the GbE board. The serial number of the main board Indicates whether a single or dual partition. See3.7 Downloading NSG Firmware on page 44. The serial number of the chassis. To set the GbE management to support the IGMPv2 protocol only, select Force IGMP V2. NSG 9000 ignores any IGMPv3 messages and does not generate any IGMPv3 messages. Read only. Indicates whether a DTI card is mounted. This field is updated after performing Get From Device. Select to enslave NSG G clock to the DTI clock. To set the DTI port redundancy mode, open the Redundancy Mode list and select one of the following: Manual - you need to select the DTI port. No automatic switching/activation of ports is done, regardless of the status of the DTI ports. Automatic (no Auto Revert) - selecting the active port is completely automatic, without any intervention and without any preference of a specific port. If the active port fails, the standby port is activated and assumes the role of "active" as long as it is in normal state. If the latter fails, ports will be switched again. This switching can continue any number of times, without any preference of a specific port. Automatic (Auto Revert) - in this mode, the selected port (as defined in Selected Port) is always preferred over the other port. In case that the selected port fails, the standby port is automatically activated. Once the selected port is fixed, the NSG automatically switches back to the selected port. To select the active DTI port, open the Selected Port list and select either port 1 or 2. The Selected Port list is disabled if Automatic (no Auto Revert) is selected. Select to enable communication with the Syslog server. Enabled once Enable Syslog is selected. Enter the IP address of the Syslog server Harmonic Inc. 134 MCT Version x, Rev B

138 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring Management Port Table 6-1: Platform s NSG G Enable HTTPS Enable HTTP Log Status Change Events Send Traps of Status Change Read only. By default this option is enabled to allow you to work in secure-mode using the HTTPS protocol. Read only. By default this option is enabled. User admin may disable it via the Web client of the device. Send a notification to the alarm log upon a change in the status of the DTI client Send an SNMP trap upon a change in the status of the DTI client 6.3 Configuring Management Port The IP address of the ETH ports or NSG G primary IP address is configured as part of the NSG G installation. However, when required, you may change the IP address settings. NOTE: Configure the IP address of ETH1 on a different subnet than that of ETH2. Configuring both ports to be on the same subnet may result in serious network communication problems. NSG G uses the ETH1 port to communicate with the network for management purposes and ETH2 for Conditional Access Systems (CAS) purposes. To change configuration of ETH1 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Device Details, select the Management tab. 3. Define the parameters as explained below: Table 6-2: Eth1 s NSG G Eth1 IP MAC Address Eth1 Mask Gateway Read only. Displays the IP address of the currently configured Eth1 port. Read only. View the MAC address of the device. Enter the Mask address of the Eth1 port Enter the IP address of Eth1 gateway 2012 Harmonic Inc. 135 MCT Version x, Rev B

139 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring the Input Ports of NSG G Table 6-2: Eth1 s NSG G Eth1 PHY Configuration Enable Eth2 Eth2 IP Eth2 IP Mask To define the physical layers of the Ethernet communication, open the Ethernet list and select one of the following: Auto Neg - The Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol used in GbE links. Select this check box to activate the Auto Negotiation protocol only if the other end of the GbE link also uses auto negotiation. 100 BT full - sets the speed to 100 BT and communication mode to full duplex. 10 BT full - sets the speed to 10 BT and communication mode to full duplex. 100 BT half - sets the speed to 100 BT and communication mode to half duplex. 10 BT half - sets the speed to 10 BT and communication mode to half duplex. Click to enable Eth2 Enter Eth2 IP address Enter Eth2 Mask address Eth2 PHY Configuration Open the list and define the physical layer of the Eth 2 communication as explained in Eth1 PHY. NOTE: The PHY configuration is available for version 2.1 and up. 6.4 Configuring the Input Ports of NSG G The NSG G is furnished with eight GbE input ports Configuring GbE Port Redundancy Overview NSG G supports 1:1 and N:1 redundancy modes for its GbE input ports. Typical port redundancy configuration depends on the application in which the NSG is deployed as the following scenarios describe: VOD application - to allow redundancy for the IP unicast VOD streams, you should use 1:1 port redundancy. Select a distinct backup port for each primary port, with the Same IP Address option checked. In this case, only the primary port is active. Broadcast application - to allow redundancy for IP multicast streams, you should use 1:1 port redundancy. SDV application - to allow redundancy for the IP multicast SDV streams, use both 1:1 and N:1 redundancy modes: 1:1 port redundancy - define for each primary port a backup port. De-select the Same IP Address option, and set a distinct IP address for the designated backup port. This mode ensures the highest level of protection against various network failures. N:1 port redundancy - allows an efficient use of the eight available input GbE ports, 2012 Harmonic Inc. 136 MCT Version x, Rev B

140 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring the Input Ports of NSG G by utilizing a single backup port for protecting several primary ports. The typical and recommended configuration for this mode is to define two groups of 3 primary ports and one backup port. For example, port 4 backs up ports 1-3 and port 8 backs up ports 5-7. In case of a redundancy switch, the backup port starts transmitting also the streams of the failed primary port(s). If traffic on any given port is expected to exceed 0.5 Gbps, select Exclusive N:1 Backup. The backup port transmits the content of the first failed primary port only and overflow of the backup port is prevented. In general, the following guidelines apply for the port redundancy feature: A primary port cannot serve as a backup port If the Same IP Address option is selected, the backup port is greyed out and the Exclusive N:1 Backup option is automatically enabled. When the primary port fails, the backup port is activated, using the same IP address of the failed port. Configuring port redundancy, blocks the port configuration. In cast Same IP Address is selected, the IP address of the backup port is automatically changed to the primary port IP address. Alarm configuration: By default both Link Down and No Input Traffic alarms trigger port redundancy. The alarm configuration of the primary port and backup port is the same. You can configure the alarms of a primary port only. When selecting a backup Port, the alarm configuration of the primary port also applies to the backup port. In N:1 port redundancy, the alarm configuration applies to the backup port and to all of the primary ports it backs up. Once you configure the backup port to backup an additional primary port, the alarm configuration automatically applies to the primary port. Any changes to the alarm configuration immediately applies to the backup port and to all primary ports it backs up. Upon redundancy switch, automatically the configured backup port is activated. If the backup port fails, a redundancy switch is performed to return to the Primary. If the primary port is still faulty, the redundancy mechanism, re-checks the last active port for a momentary failure. If it is still faulty, the redundancy switch reverts to the primary and keeps checking in increased intervals the configured backup port, until detecting an active port. To configure the NSG G GbE ports 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the GbE tab. 3. Enter the required values according to the following provided information: NOTE: NGOD Input Group Name and Backup port apply to version 2.1 and up only. Table 6-3: GbE Port s for NSG G NSG IP GbE No. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Displays the number of the active port. Switching mode - each GbE port has its own row and both ports are active Harmonic Inc. 137 MCT Version x, Rev B

141 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring the Input Ports of NSG G Table 6-3: GbE Port s for NSG G Enable Port IP Address IP Mask Route Refresh Refresh Interval Auto Negotiation NGOD Input Group Name NGOD Assigned Bandwidth (Mbps) Enable Forwarding Destination Port Backup Port Same IP Trigger Link Down Check the box to enable the port. If you clear the box, the port does not admit input even if the other parameters are configured properly. Switching mode - Check the box for each port to enable both ports. The IP address of the GbE 1 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected QAM mapping mode. The subnet mask. If checked, the NSG routinely sends "Ping" requests to the gateway of the GbE port. Requests are sent approximately once per 10 seconds, thus preventing expiration of the route. Define, in Msec, how often to send a Ping request. Controls (for each GbE channel separately) whether Auto Negotiation is activated. Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol used in GbE links. Check this option if the other end of the GbE link (typically a GbE switch) also uses Auto Negotiation. Otherwise, the box must be cleared. Activating Auto Negotiation while communicating with a device that does not use it causes communication problems. Enter the name of the input group according to the D6 standard. Enter the bandwidth of the GbE port assigned for the NGOD ERM. The default is 1000Mbps, that is the full capacity of the port is assigned for the NGOD ERM. You can enter a value between in increments of 100. If you enter 0, the GbE port is not available for the NGOD ERM. Select to allow NSG 9000 to duplicate the incoming content of this GbE port to the GbE port that is defined as a mirroring port in Destination Port. Select the mirroring port. Connect the mirroring port to devices that accept GbE input such as an MPEG analyzer. For cabling instructions, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware guide If required, select a backup port. If port X is the backup of port Y, port X cannot have a backup port. However, a port may serve as a backup to more than one primary port. Note: Configure port redundancy only when no sessions are provisioned to the port. In VOD application - to allow redundancy for IP unicast VOD streams, you should use 1:1 port redundancy. Select a distinct backup port for each primary port, with the Same IP Address option checked. Applies to NSG G version 2.3 and up. By default Link Down is checked and when the alarm is raised, it triggers port redundancy. Uncheck if Link Down should not trigger redundancy Harmonic Inc. 138 MCT Version x, Rev B

142 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring/Viewing RF Module s Table 6-3: GbE Port s for NSG G Trigger No Input Traffic Applies to NSG G version 2.3 and up. By default No Input Traffic is checked and when the alarm is raised, it triggers port redundancy. Uncheck, if No Input Traffic should not trigger redundancy Input Forwarding NSG G support IP forwarding for monitoring a GbE port. For explanation, see Table 6-3 on page Configuring/Viewing RF Module s Once you read information from the device, the RF Module tab updates to display information about each slot and the installed module. Thus, some of the parameters of the RF Module tab are read only. You can also define global RF module parameters QAM-RF Module Redundancy The RF module redundancy protects the network from a faulty QAM-RF module. The RF module redundancy allows an intra-chassis redundancy switch that does not require an additional backup device. You may define the RF module in slot nine as the redundancy module for any faulty RF module. As a result, the redundancy switch takes place among the QAM-RF modules and not between a primary and backup devices. For the RF module redundancy to take place, the following should apply: Up to 8 of the NSG G QAM-RF modules in slots one to eight, are configured and provisioned with TSs. The QAM manager of all QAMs of these QAM-RF modules should be Broadcast. NOTE: RF module redundancy applies to QAM-RF module with Broadcast QAM manager only. The QAM-RF module in slot nine only is not configured and is reserved for redundancy purposes. However, the QAM manager of all QAMs of module nine is Broadcast. The Enable Module Redundancy option is selected Upon failure of any of the active modules, the backup module is automatically activated with the configuration of the faulty QAM-RF module. The typical fail-over time is between seconds. Use the RF module redundancy if the following applies: All output RF ports of the NSG9000-6G device are combined into a single RF network. When relatively high availability at reasonable cost is required. NOTE: If high availability cannot be compromised, use 1:1 device redundancy. It provides protection against various failures and shorter fail-over time. To view and configure RF module parameters 1. Read information from the device (Select the device and click Get from Device.) 2. Select the RF Module tab Harmonic Inc. 139 MCT Version x, Rev B

143 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring/Viewing RF Module s 3. View/configure the following information: Table 6-4: RF Module tab - NSG 1.5.x & Up NSG IP Slot No. Actual Card Expected Card Annex Constellation Symbol Rate Interleaver 1 Displays the IP address of ETH1. Displays the slot in of the RF module, usually a number between 1-9. Indicates the actual module type. NSG-6G supports the NSG-8R1G card type. This is an octal card that supports up to eight QAM-RF channels per RF port. Indicates the configured module type. Select the required ITU-T Annex: Annex-A (DVB) - this mode is used mainly in European and Asian countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 8 MHz per QAM-RF channel. Annex-B - this is the mode used in North-American countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel. Annex-C (Japan) as implied by its name, used mainly in Japan. Similar to Annex-A in the most part, but utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel. To define the required constellation, open the Constellation list. The Constellation is the type of Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) used. QAM constellation affects Data Rate and Symbol Rate, and must be set according to HFC network properties. Valid values are: Annex-A or Annex-C 16, 32, 64, 128, 256 Annex-B 64 and 256 Define/view the rate of QAM symbols that are encoded and transmitted per second. You can define the symbol rate in Annex A and C. In Annex B, you can only view its value. View the interleaver values as defined in the QAM tab. NSG 9000 has two optional Interleaver values, set the required value for this interleaver. Interleaver 2 See Interleaver 1. QAM Placement RF Template Read only. Relevant to QAM OCTAL only. Block is the standard placement of adjacent QAM-RFs along the 48Mhz block, depending on the selected ITU-T Annex. Select the required EIA type: EIS-STD - frequency is defined using channel numbers based on the EIA-STD channel table. See EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps on page 208. EIA-HRC - RF settings are entered using channel numbers based on the EIA-HRC channel table. See EIA SDT and HRC Standards on page Harmonic Inc. 140 MCT Version x, Rev B

144 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G RF Module Redundancy Table 6-4: RF Module tab - NSG 1.5.x & Up Enable Redundancy Select to enable module redundancy. See QAM-RF Module Redundancy on page RF Module Redundancy RF Module Redundancy Overview The RF module redundancy protects the network from a faulty QAM-RF module. The RF module redundancy allows an intra-chassis redundancy switch that does not require an additional backup device. You may define the RF module in slot nine as the redundancy module for any faulty RF module. As a result, the redundancy switch takes place among the QAM-RF modules and not between a primary and backup devices. For the RF module redundancy to take place, the following should apply: Up to 8 of the NSG G QAM-RF modules in slots one to eight, are configured and provisioned with TSs. The QAM manager of all QAMs of these QAM-RF modules should be Broadcast. NOTE: RF module redundancy applies to QAM-RF module with Broadcast QAM manager only. The QAM-RF module in slot nine only is not configured and is reserved for redundancy purposes. However, the QAM manager of all QAMs of module nine is Broadcast. The Enable Module Redundancy option is selected Upon failure of any of the active modules, the backup module is automatically activated with the configuration of the faulty QAM-RF module. The typical fail-over time is between seconds. Use the RF module redundancy if the following applies: All output RF ports of the NSG9000-6G device are combined into a single RF network. When relatively high availability at reasonable cost is required. NOTE: If high availability cannot be compromised, use 1:1 device redundancy. It provides protection against various failures and shorter fail-over time Enabling the RF Module Redundancy By default, QAM-RF module redundancy is disabled. To start RF module redundancy, do the following: 1. Read information from the device. (Select the device and click Get from Device.) 2. Select the RF Module tab and select Enable Redundancy for at the required RF Module Harmonic Inc. 141 MCT Version x, Rev B

145 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G RF Module Redundancy The record of module 9 is disabled. You cannot change the configuration of the backup module The record of slot 9 is disabled Enabled Redundancy for at least one slot is enabled 3. In the message that appears, Click OK. The message notifies that once redundancy configuration is applied, the RF ports of module nine will shut down. 4. Send to device Manual Fail Over Once the module is faulty, the module in slot nine takes its place. At any time you can generate a module redundancy switch to a module of your choice. To generate a manual fail over 1. In Device Information section, select the required device. The Module Redundancy group in enabled. Device is selected in Device Information RF Module Redundancy group is enabled 2. Click RF Module Redundancy group Harmonic Inc. 142 MCT Version x, Rev B

146 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G RF Module Redundancy The following dialog appears: 3. RF Module Number displays the module number with RF module redundancy enabled. To select another module, open the RF Module list and select the required RF module. 4. To generate a manual fail-over, click Activate Backup Module. The Action dialog opens. 5. Wait until action is successfully sent to device Reverting Redundancy Module Reverting back to the primary QAM-RF module once the fault is fixed is manual only. 1. In Device Information section, select the required device. The Module Redundancy group in enabled. Device is selected in Device Information RF Module Redundancy group is enabled 2. Click RF Module Redundancy group. The following dialog appears: 3. Click Revert to Primary Harmonic Inc. 143 MCT Version x, Rev B

147 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring EdgeCluster s 6.7 Configuring EdgeCluster s EdgeCluster Overview The edgecluster is comprised of two devices defined as primary and backup. Typically the primary device is active and the backup device is in standby mode. Both devices are configured the same except for the management ports. Both devices are provisioned with sessions that are transmitted by the primary/active device. The backup device stands by ready to become active upon primary failure or manual redundancy switch. Both devices, the primary and the backup communicate with each other via their Eth1 and Eth2 ports: Eth1 - management port connection. See NSG G Hardware and Installation User Guide. Each device is configured with a unique management port, IP address of Eth1. Eth2 - Each device is configured with a unique IP address of Eth2. The subnet of Eth2 ports should be different than the subnet of Eth1 ports. Eth2 ports are connected with an Ethernet crossover cable. The edgecluster system described above applies to both M-CMTS and Broadcast deployments with the following differences: Table 6-5: EdgeCluster M-CMTS Versus Broadcast Item Deployment Difference Connectivity M-CMTS No use of GbE switch. The downstream GbE port of the GbE source is directly connected to the NSG GbE input ports. GbE Input Ports Broadcast The GbE input ports of both NSG devices must be configured the same. However, each device should have a unique IP address of the input port. Redundancy Switch M-CMTS M-CMTS The GbE input ports of both NSG devices must be configured the same including the IP addresses of the GbE input ports. Note: For proper edgecluster operation, GbE ports of the primary and backup devices should have fiber SFPs. Upon redundancy switch, the active device momentarily shuts up its GbE ports to signal the source device that the device is faulty. The following instructions assume that you wish to apply edgecluster to devices via MCT. The devices are controlled by MCT and you obtained the configuration via Get from Device. See Synchronizing Configurations on page 54. For the physical connections, see NSG G version 2.7 Software Guide Enabling EdgeCluster Configuration NOTE: The following explanation applies to NSG9000-6G version and up. 1. Verify that you are in NSG9000-6G filter. 2. Click MCT button Harmonic Inc. 144 MCT Version x, Rev B

148 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring EdgeCluster s 3. Click MCT Options. Select EdgeCluster 4. Select General. 5. In General Properties section, select EdgeCluster Display. In the MCT ribbon, in the Home tab, the EdgeCluster group appears. Its options are disabled. In Device Information, the edgecluster parameters appear and only EdgeCluster Mode is enabled. To enable the EdgeCluster group, configure the edgecluster parameters for both devices with proper peer IP values. Upon selecting one of the edgecluster devices, the EdgeCluster group is enabled Harmonic Inc. 145 MCT Version x, Rev B

149 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring EdgeCluster s The edgecluster group includes the following buttons: Table 6-6: EdgeCluster Group Button Sync Cluster Get State Set to Active Synchronizes the configuration in the cluster. See Synchronizing Cluster on page 147. Click to update the current state of the device in the edgecluster: Active, Standby, Failed, N/A. Enabled when device is part of an edgecluster and the state of the device is standby or failed Configuring EdgeCluster s 1. Verify that the expected firmware version of the devices is version and up. 2. Verify that Eth2 of both devices is enabled. In Details, select the Management tab and verify that Enable ETH2 is selected. 3. Configure the edgecluster parameters as follows: Table 6-7: EdgeCluster s EdgeCluster Mode Role State EdgeCluster Application Eth1 Peer IP To allow the edgecluster mode, select either one of the edgecluster modes: Automatic - the redundancy switch takes place automatically upon active device failure Manual - the redundancy switch is manual only using the Set to Active button. Note: When you select one of the above modes, you enable the rest of the edgecluster parameters that are configurable. Disabled - edgecluser is disabled. Select this mode in case you want to disable the edgecluster mode: All the edgecluster parameters are disabled. Enabled when Automatic or Manual mode is selected. Select the role of the device: Primary Backup Read only. Indicates the state of the device: Active, Standby, or Failed with indication of the last time the state was updated. To update the state, click Get State in the EdgeCluster group. Enabled when Automatic or Manual mode is selected. Select either of the following: Broadcast M-CMTS Enabled when Automatic or Manual mode is selected. Select the IP address of the Eth1 port of the peer device. The list is populated with all NSG9000-6G devices on the current site with the same version that are not part of another cluster Harmonic Inc. 146 MCT Version x, Rev B

150 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring EdgeCluster s Table 6-7: EdgeCluster s Eth2 Peer IP Updated as soon as you select the Eth1 peer IP. Once you defined the Eht1 Peer IP and Eth2 Peer IP, the EdgeCluster group is enabled. 4. If the configuration of the devices to work in the edgecluster mode is not the same, move to Synchronizing Cluster on page 147. If the configuration of the devices to works in the edgecluster mode is the same, as explained in EdgeCluster Overview on page 144, send the edgecluster configuration to the devices. Click Send to Device per edgecluster peer. For guidelines for working with devices in edgecluster, see Working with Devices in EdgeCluster on page Synchronizing Cluster The configuration of both devices of the edgecluster should be the same. Sync. Cluster feature, allows you to copy configuration from a device to its peer device. All configuration is copied from one device to the other except for the following: MCT Section Information Platform GbE Management Authentication SDV that is not copied Device IP Device Name Rack Slot Comments NMX Network group Actual Firmware Version Expected Firmware Version Edge Cluster parameters Eth1 IP GbE FPGA Version MB Serial Number MB Storage Format Chassis Serial Number IP Address IP Mask RF Module: Actual Card Expected Card Serial Number MAC Address Eth1 Mask Gateway Eth2 IP Eth2 IP Mask all parameters ISA redundancy mode 2012 Harmonic Inc. 147 MCT Version x, Rev B

151 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring EdgeCluster s MCT Section Virtual IPs Licensing Routing that is not copied All parameters All parameters All parameters To sync. configuration 1. In Device Information section, select a device. The EdgeCluster group is enabled. 2. Click Sync. Cluster. The following dialog appears: 3. The From list is populated with both edgecluster peers. Open the list and select either primary or backup device. 4. The To list is populated with both edgecluster peers. Open the list and select either primary or backup device. 5. Click Sync Configuration. 6. Wait until the action is completed successfully. The edgecluster devices have the same configuration. 7. Send the edgecluster configuration to the devices. Click Send to Device per edgecluster peer Working with Devices in EdgeCluster When you want to get configuration from a device in edgecluster, by using the Get From Device feature, the edgecluster configuration of the device and MCT should be identical. In the Device Information section, edgecluster devices are organized in their clusters and each cluster has a unique color. The Sort button, allows you to sort the clusters. Primary device is usually the first EdgeCluster Maintenance EdgeCluster and Firmware Upgrade on page Replacing a Faulty Module in EdgeCluster Mode on page Harmonic Inc. 148 MCT Version x, Rev B

152 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring EdgeCluster s EdgeCluster and Firmware Upgrade When you wish to upgrade the firmware of NSG G devices working in EdgeCluster mode, perform the following steps in their provided order. The provided instructions refer to upgrade from firmware version and above. For upgrade of older versions while devices are in edgecluster mode, call customer support. To upgrade the firmware of the MSG 9000 device in EdgeCluster Mode NOTE: During this procedure you are instructed to upgrade the firmware of the Backup device first. Table 6-8: EdgeCluster Firmware Upgrade Primary Device Backup Device 1. Verify that both devices are working properly. 6. Upgrade the firmware as instructed on page Verify that the device is running properly with the newly installed firmware 8. In Device Information, select the primary device. 9. Click Set to Active. Note: Services are flowing through the primary device. 2. Upgrade the firmware as instructed on page Verify that the device is running properly with the newly installed firmware and apply the required configuration to the device. Note: The backup device is currently working with the new firmware. 4. In Device Information, select the Backup device. 5. Click Set to Active. Note: Services are flowing through the backup device Replacing a Faulty Module in EdgeCluster Mode The following instructions refer to devices that work in edgecluster mode and you need to replace a faulty QAM-RF module or power supply. 1. Verify that the device with the faulty module is in Standby state. 2. Replace faulty module. See NSG9000-6G Hardware and Installation Guide. 3. Verify that the device is working properly Harmonic Inc. 149 MCT Version x, Rev B

153 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring VOD s 4. Apply EdgeCluster by configuring the required role in the edgecluster. See Enabling EdgeCluster Configuration on page Configuring VOD s Configure VOD parameters when the NSG G device serves as a highly integrated digital video gateway, capable of multiplexing on-demand content streamed over an IP network. To configure VOD parameters 1. In device Information, select the required device 2. In Details, select the VOD tab. 3. Configure the parameters as explained below: NOTE: Encryption Mode, Emulation Template and Serving Area Location attributes apply to version 2.1 and up only. Table 6-9: VOD s - NSG G NSG IP Encryption Mode Emulation Template PID Remapping From PID (Hex) To PID (Hex) Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Select either of the following: DVB Scrambling - standard scrambling method PM Scrambling - Motorola s scrambling method Note: currently only PM scrambling is available. The Emulation Template, previously known as QAM Mapping Mode is set by default to Normal. In this case, each RF-QAM port accommodates up to eight channels. The NSG G device may emulate the operation of other NSG GbE devices which require a different mapping of the QAMs. When emulating an NSG GbE, NSG G routes the UDP range to a QAM. For example UDP 0x501 is routed to QAM=1.2.1, Service ID=1. You can select one of the customized emulation templates and send them to the device. You may choose either the Paradigm (e.g. set formula) or the Random options to govern the method elementary streams are remapped and transmitted. The chosen option will take affect only after resetting the NSG. See, PID Remapping Options on page 85. Available only when Random is selected. This is the lower limit of the PID range and is written in hexadecimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0. Available only when Random is selected. This is the upper limit of the PID range and is written in hexadecimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF Harmonic Inc. 150 MCT Version x, Rev B

154 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring SDV s Table 6-9: VOD s - NSG G PAT Interval PMT Interval Update PMT Version Create SAT Original Network ID (Hex) Serving Area Location in SAT Auto Detection Session Inactivity Teardown Threshold (sec) Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams. Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams. The allowed range is ms. The value chosen must be divisible by 66 and if not, the NSG will round up or down to the closest divisible decimal value. Select Update PMT Version to update the PMT version. This version is incremented every time the PMT s data is changed (e.g. the Video PID changes). Select Create SAT (Service Area Table), to create SAT at the output. Once Create SAT is selected, the following parameters are enabled: Original Network ID Serving Area Location in SAT Note: To create SAT, serving area should be up to 16bits (range of ). See Table 6-17 on page 157. If Create SAT is selected, define the original network ID. If Create SAT is selected, open the Serving Area Location in SAT list and select one of the following: TS ID - the serving area is written to the TS ID. First Service Name - the serving area is written to the first service name Both - the serving area is written to both the TS ID and the first service name. Check to allow auto detected VOD sessions. Enter the allowed duration, in seconds, for session inactivity before the session is removed from the output. 6.9 Configuring SDV s NSG 9000 supports service redundancy that is activated once the device does not detect the service at the input port. Service redundancy is supported in either of the following methods: Hot - NSG 9000 JOINs both the primary multicast group and the backup multicast group. Both primary and backup services are at the input to allow short fail-over time. Warm - NSG 9000 JOINS the primary multicast group only. Once the device does not detect the service at the input, it JOINs the backup multicast group and the fail-over time is longer. To define SDV redundancy parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the SDV tab Harmonic Inc. 151 MCT Version x, Rev B

155 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring ISA-Device Communication 3. Configure the following parameters: Table 6-10: SDV Redundancy parameters NSG IP NGOD Redundancy Mode Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Select one of the following modes: Hot/Warm - the default option. The service has only one redundant service. NSG 9000 JOINs the primary service, and upon failure, JOINs the backup multicast group. As a result, the backup service is streamed from the switch to the input port of the device. Hot/Hot - the service has one redundant service. NSG 9000 JOINs both the primary and backup multicast groups and both groups are steamed to the device. Upon failure, the device inputs the backup service resulting in a short fail-over time. Hot/Warm/Warm - the service has at least two redundant services. NSG 9000 JOINs the primary multicast group. Upon failure NSG 9000 JOINs the first backup service and as a result the backup service is streamed into the device. If this trial fails, NSG 9000 JOINs the second backup multicast group. Hot/Hot/Hot - the service has at least two redundant services. NSG 9000 JOINs all three multicast groups. All three services are streamed to the input port to allow short fail-over time. ISA Redundancy Mode See NGOD Redundancy Mode explanation Configuring ISA-Device Communication To receive streams provisioned by ISA, set the following parameters. 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the ISA tab. 3. Configure the following parameters: Table 6-11: NSG G and ISA SRM communication Firmware Version N/A Eth1 Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. N/A Enable Reset Indication If selected, an indication is sent to the ISA server (either ERM or SRM) upon reset. N/A SRM IP Address Enter the IP address of the SRM server. N/A SRM Port Enter the port number over which the device communicates with the SRM. N/A Timeout Period Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between the NSG trials to connect to the ISA server Harmonic Inc. 152 MCT Version x, Rev B

156 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring ISA-Device Communication Table 6-11: NSG G and ISA SRM communication Firmware Version N/A Report PMT Section (QuerySessionInfo) Input Port for Shell Session When selected, in QuerySessionInfo, the PMT packet data is sent to the ISA server. Applies to SDV sessions. The input port in the provisioning message is not indicated. The edgeqam attempts to receive the input stream via the input port indicated in this field. The default port is port SDV Load-sharing Port A SDV Load-sharing Port B SDV Load-Sharing Port A - D Applies to SDV sessions. The input port in the provisioning message is not indicated. The edgeqam attempts to receive the input stream via the input port indicated in this field. The default port is port 1. Optional configuration. Configure this parameter when SDV traffic exceeds 1Giga. In this case, the NSG manages the traffic between both input ports for SDV session. The NSG sends the sessions to the input port for SDV session with less traffic. If both ports are equally loaded with traffic, the device sends the traffic to the port defined as the first input port for SDV sessions. Applies to ISA-SDV sessions. The input port in the provisioning message is not indicated. The edgeqam attempts to receive the input stream via the input ports indicated in the SDV Load-Sharing Port A-D boxes. The default port is GbE port 1, indicated in SDV Load-Sharing Port A. You can configure up to four GbE input ports to handle up to four Gigabytes of SDV traffic. The NSG manages the traffic between the selected input ports. The NSG sends the sessions to the input port for SDV session with less traffic. If SDV ports are equally loaded with traffic, the device sends the traffic to the ports according to the sequential order of the port numbers. NOTE: The number of the ports should be in a sequential order from one to eight. Port number can be 0 only if the number of the following SDV port is 0 as well. SDV Load-Sharing Port A cannot be 0. NOTE: GbE input port that is selected as an SDV-load sharing port, cannot be a backup port. N/A Enable Announce Message Check to enable the announce message indication required by the ISA and the RCAS protocols. This message is sent to the SRM due to the following: Provisioning a service Alarm is raised on the session A redundancy switch over the session source Session is missing from the output 2012 Harmonic Inc. 153 MCT Version x, Rev B

157 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring ISA-Device Communication Defining Virtual ISA Devices To enable the ISA server to handle the full capacity of QAM-RFs of the edgqam, use the virtual IPs for ISA feature. This feature creates virtual IPs only for the use of the ISA server. To create virtual ISA IPs, do the following: Create virtual IPs - requires to define the following: Eth1 Virtual IPs - You can add virtual IPs to ETh1 only. Eth1 virtual IPs should be on a subnet other than Eth2 subnet. GbE Virtual IPs - You can add GbE virtual IPs to any of the GbE ports. GbE Virtual IP can be the same as the physical GbE IP. Associate virtual devices with VOD QAM manager or ISA SRM QAM Manager Creating Virtual Management IPs 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the Eth1 Virtual IPs (ISA) tab. 3. Click Add. A blank row is added to the table. 4. Configure the following parameters: Table 6-12: NSG G Eth1 Virtual IPs (ISA) NSG IP Index Virtual IP Mask Status Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs. Enter the virtual Ethernet port IP address. Virtual IP should be different than the physical Eth1 IP address and on a subnet other than Eth2. Enter a subnet mask In Status, view the status of the Eth1 virtual IP: In Use - the virtual IP is currently in use No in Use - the virtual IP is currently not in use Creating GbE Virtual IP (ISA) 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the GbE Virtual IPs (ISA) tab. 3. Click Add. A blank row is added to the table. 4. Configure the following parameters: Table 6-13: NSG G GbE Virtual IPs (ISA) NSG IP Index GbE Port Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs. Enter the GbE virtual port number Harmonic Inc. 154 MCT Version x, Rev B

158 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Setting Device Time and Date Table 6-13: NSG G GbE Virtual IPs (ISA) Virtual IP Mask Management IP Enter the virtual GbE IP address. You can add up to 10 GbE virtual IPs. Enter the required mask IP View the management IP of the virtual GbE port To associate virtual devices with ISA 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the Virtual Devices (ISA) tab. 3. Click Add. A blank row is added to the table. 4. Configure the following parameters: Table 6-14: NSG G Virtual Devices (ISA) NSG IP Index Eth1 Virtual IP GbE Port: Virtual IP Virtual Input Port Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs. Open the list and select the required virtual management port. The list is propagated with the Eth1 virtual IPs created previously. Open the list and select the required virtual GbE port. The list is propagated with GbE IPs that you can use as GbE virtual IPs. The GBE interface appears in the following format: <x>:<virtual GbE IP>, where x is the physical GbE port of the edgeqam, an integer between 1-8. Select the required GbE interface. Enter the required port according to the ISA provisioning Setting Device Time and Date 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the Time tab. 3. Configure the parameters as explained below: Table 6-15: Device Time s - NSG G version 2.0 NSG IP Enable NTP NTP Server Address Read Only. Displays the IP address of Eth1 port Select to allow to establish communication with the NTP server, select Enable NTP. Enter the IP address of the NTP server Harmonic Inc. 155 MCT Version x, Rev B

159 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring TS Out s Table 6-15: Device Time s - NSG G version 2.0 Time Zone DST Start Date SDT End Date Open the Time Zone list and select the required local time offset to match between the time of the device, that is UTC time, and the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). In Daylight Saving Time Start Date, enter the required date. In Daylight Saving Time End Date, enter the required date. Table 6-16: Device Time s - NSG G version 2.1 and Up IP address Enable NTP NTP Server Address Enable Daylight Saving Time Offset Location City/Province Read Only. Displays the IP address of Eth1 port Select to allow to establish communication with the NTP server, select Enable NTP. Enter the IP address of the NTP server. Select to enable daylight saving time. Once selected, Location and City/Province attributes are enabled. The daylight saving time is automatically defined according to the selected location and city/province. Available when Enable Daylight Saving is not selected. Open the Time Offset list and select the required local time offset to match between the time of the device, that is UTC time, and the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Select the required location. Select the required city/province Configuring TS Out s For each NSG 9000 platform record, MCT creates up to 144 transport stream rows under the TS tab. Each row corresponds to one transport stream. The number of output streams is license dependent. If in # QAMs Per Port, two channels are defined, only two QAM channels are active and only two streams are outputted once a license is granted. MCT allocates for each port a maximum of eight index numbers for the TS IDs. For example, if only two ports are active in the first slot, the TS IDs are 1, 2 and TS IDs 3-8 are reserved for when all eight channels of the port are active. In the same way TS IDs are reserved for when in slot two all eight channels of the port are active. Configure the output ports and signals for each stream of each NSG. You must first select a channel bandwidth and then set the other parameters. To define the out TS parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the QAM & TS tab. 3. Define the parameters as explained in the following table Harmonic Inc. 156 MCT Version x, Rev B

160 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring TS Out s NOTE: PM License and NGOD QAM Group Name apply to version 2.1 and up only. Table 6-17: TS Out s - NSG G Field NSG IP Slot Number Port Number QAM No. Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Read only. Displays the number of the slots from 1-9. For slots arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware User s Guide. Read only. Each QAM-RF module has two ports. This field indicates the QAM-RF port number. For QAM-RF port arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware User s Guide. Read only. Displays the QAM channel in a sequential order from (Basically there are up to 144 output TSs). Along this range, select the required QAM channel. The channels are available according to the defined No. of channels. For example, if the No. of Channels is defined as three in slot 1 the available QAM channels are 1, 2, 3, 9, 10 and 11. # QAMs Per Port Select the number of active QAM channels from 1-8 active channels (Annex B & C) and 1-6 Annex A. The number of active channels is license dependent and by default two channels are active. Note: The frequency of the QAM channels is consecutive and each channel utilizes six or eight MHz: In ANNEX B and C - 6MHz and in ANNEX A 8MHz. QAM Index Serv. Area Read only. Displays the The number of the QAM channels of the QAM-RF module in a sequential order from 2x (1-8). Indicates the area this transport stream serves. This value is provided by the vendor and may help you when exporting this database to NMX template. Once you export this database to NMX template, you can monitor the serving area and generate statistical reports. Note: If you use Create SAT, serving area should be up to 16bits (range of ). See Table 6-9 on page 150. TS ID The ID number of the Transport Stream ranging from 1- > This ID serves in the PAT (Program Allocation Table) of the given TS, to comply with the DVB standard. QAM Manager EIA Type The QAM manager determines the functionality of the QAM. The default QAM manager is NGOD ERM. You can select one of the QAM managers listed in the QAM Manager table, see Table 6-18: QAM Manager on page 159. Read only. Displays the EIA type as configured in the RF Module tab Harmonic Inc. 157 MCT Version x, Rev B

161 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring TS Out s Table 6-17: TS Out s - NSG G EIA Channel RF Freq. (Hz) Power Level per QAM (dbmv) Power Level Per QAM (dbuv) Interleaver Spectral Inversion Mute QAM CW Enable RF Port QAM License Field The default entry. It indicates the channel number for the RF as defined in the EIA standard. When N/A appears, it indicates that the RF frequency does not comply with the frequencies defined by the EIA. By default, indicates the RF frequency according to the EIA channel number configured in EIA Freq. You can define another required frequency and then N/A appears in EIA Freq. The entered frequency should be divisible by 100. The allowed ranges indicating the center frequencies: Annex B & C - 35,000, ,000,000 Hz Annex A - 36,000, ,000,000 Hz Frequencies below 50MHz are for special Broadcast deployments that require IF output. The RF power level in dbmv. When you change the power level of a stream (for example, of stream 1), the power level of its associated stream (for example, stream 5) is automatically updated accordingly. You can specify numbers that contain a decimal digit as well (for example, 50.5). Read only. Indicates the RF power level in dbuv. Once you enter the power level per QAM in dbmv, this parameter is updated to display the power level also in dbuv. Applies to NSG9000-6G version and up. The Interleaver settings determine the robustness of the QAM signal to transmission errors. Recommended values are: ANNEX-A and ANNEX C: In ANNEX-B Interleaver value depens on the constellation Constellation 64: 128-1, constellation 256: 128-4, If checked, spectral inversion is enabled By default the QAM is on and outputting streams. To close the QAM, check the required Mute QAM box. Select for testing purposes only. If checked, opens the RF output of a pair of transport streams unless it is a module of SINGLE. Clear the box to close the outputs. Transport stream output is enabled only if both the IF and Port Enable boxes are checked. Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a QAM license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM license was requested and granted Harmonic Inc. 158 MCT Version x, Rev B

162 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring TS Out s Table 6-17: TS Out s - NSG G Field PM License GbE Port GbE IP Address UDP Port Min UDP Port Max NGOD QAM Group Name Check the QAM channel you wish to request for it a PM license. Previously checked boxes indicate that a QAM license was requested and granted. The GbE port that is provisioned to the QAM. The IP address of the GbE port that is provisioned to the QAM. The first UDP port provisioned to the QAM. The last UDP port provisioned to the QAM. Enter the QAM group name according to the D6 standard. NOTE: Version 2.o supports QAM managers VOD SRM and ISA SRM only. Table 6-18: QAM Manager QAM-RF Manager VOD SRM NGOD ERM (default) ISA SRM Application VOD Service & PID Remux VOD SDV Service & PID Remux SDV VOD Service & PID Remux VOD - the NSG 9000 automatically detects the incoming streams and automatically routes them, according to the indicated UDP, to the required QAM- RF channel. The traffic routed via the QAM-RFs is controlled by the SRM (Session Resource Manager). The SRM may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID remux. The NGOD ERM controls the QAM-RFs for binding SDV sessions and for routing VOD sessions. The ERM may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID remux. All QAM-RFs send D6 messages to the NGOD ERM if NGOD ERM server is configured and enabled by selecting Applications > NGOD. All QAM-RFs are controlled by ISA (Interactive Service Architecture) using the RPC protocol. VOD sessions are provisioned via ISA or by autodetection. The ISA may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID remux. Broadcast PID Range The device allows to pass a specific range of PIDs from an input stream to the output. M-CMTS M-CMTS The QAM-RFs deliver M-CMTS data and are controlled by the CMTS. D2E D2E The D2E server controls the QAMs. Future use only Harmonic Inc. 159 MCT Version x, Rev B

163 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring Network Routing s NOTE: To change a QAM Manager, verify that no session, service or PID are provisioned/remuxed to this QAM-RF Configuring Network Routing s See 4.7 Configuring Network Routing s on page Configuring Broadcast s In Broadcast application mode, NSG G allows to route input content to any output, that is to define a session. NSG G allows to create the following types of sessions: Pass through - to route complete input MPTSs by using the Pass Through tab. Applies to version 2.1 and up. Service Remux - to route specific MPEG services (programs) using the Service Remux tab PID Remux - to route individual PIDs using the PID Remux tab. Applies to version 2.1 and up. NOTE: VOD application supports barker channels. A VOD session may stream out also a remuxed service or PID Defining Passthrough Sessions The Pass Through option, allows to output a socket without any changes, that is without remapping and without generating tables. When this option is selected all services in the socket are outputted via the selected output port. When passing through a TS or a service, you cannot remux a service or a PID included in the pass through TS or service. In addition, you cannot multiplex other input streams to the pass through QAM Backing Up a Passthrough Session An input socket may have up to two backup input sockets. By default, the first input socket is the primary socket. If it fails, automatically the following configured socket is activated. If the active input socket is the last one in the list and it fails, the redundancy switch is performed manually only. You need to manually switch to another input socket. To configure a pass through a session NOTE: A session is defined as Pass Through during QAM&TS configuration. (See 6.12 Configuring TS Out s on page 156). 1. In Details, select the BCST Pass Through tab. 2. Define the parameters as explained in the table below: Table 6-19: Pass Through Session s NSG IP Session ID Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the number of the session in the current page Harmonic Inc. 160 MCT Version x, Rev B

164 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring Broadcast s Table 6-19: Pass Through Session s Source Type Enable Backup Active Multicast GbE Port No. IP Address UDP Port Source IP Read only. Indicates whether the session is a Primary or a Backup session. By default, the first input socket is the primary socket. Select to enable backup. The socket is automatically activated upon failure. See Backing Up a Passthrough Session on page 160. By default the primary input socket is the active one. Once backup is enabled, select the required active session. To view the currently active socket, perform Get From Device. Select to enable multicast. Enter the required input port. Enter the IP address of the selected GbE port. Enter the UDP port. Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket. Output QAM No. Read only. Indicates the output QAM, a number between Defining Service Remux Sessions You can route a service from any input to any output. You can select whether to output the service with its input ID or to remap it. When provisioning static sessions through the web client or MCT, session ID starts at 10,000 and you can configure up to 100 sessions only. NOTE: You cannot remux PIDs of remuxed services. To route a service 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the Service Remux tab. 3. Click Add. A blank row is added. 4. Define the parameters as explained below: Table 6-20: Service Remux Session NSG IP Session ID Multicast GbE Port No. Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the number of the session in the current page. Select multicast in case the input stream is a multicast TS. Select the input GbE Port Harmonic Inc. 161 MCT Version x, Rev B

165 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring Broadcast s Table 6-20: Service Remux Session IP Address UDP Port Source IP Output QAM No. Service ID Enter the required unicast/multicast IP address of the input port. Enter the UDP port number. Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket Enter the QAM number, a number between 1-144, to output the session. Enter the required output service ID. You can output the service with the same input ID number or to remap the service Defining PID Remux You can route a PID from any input to any output. You can route up to 8 PIDs to an output, or configure up to 1152 PID sessions. You can select whether to add a PMT reference to the PID. You can route an input PID to a few outputs and remap a PID to output it over different outputs. However, you cannot route a PID to the same output with different remapped PIDs. The PID 0x10 is reserved for the Network Information Table (NIT). If you remux a PID and remap it to PID 0x10, the PAT points to it as a NIT table PID. NSG 9000 ignores any of the PID 0x10 configuration such as PMT reference and a descriptor. To route a PID 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the PID Remux tab. 3. Click Add. A blank row is added. 4. Define the parameters as explained below: Table 6-21: PID Remux Session NSG IP Session ID Multicast GbE Port No. IP Address UDP Port Source IP Input PID (Hex) Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the number of the session in the current page. Select multicast in case the input stream is a multicast TS. Select the input GbE Port. Enter the required unicast/multicast IP address of the input port. Enter the UDP port number. Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket To define the required PID, in Input PID, enter in hexadecimal the required input PID number Harmonic Inc. 162 MCT Version x, Rev B

166 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring Broadcast s Table 6-21: PID Remux Session Input PID (Dec) Output QAM No. Output PID (Hex) Output PID (Hex) PMT Reference ES Type Descriptors Read only. Displays, in decimal, the value you have entered in Input PID (Hex). Enter the QAM number, a number between 1-144, to output the PID. Enter the output PID number in hexadecimal. You can output the PID with the same input PID number or to remap the PID. Read only. Displays, in decimal, the value you have entered in Output PID (Hex). To allow PMT reference, select the PMT Ref box. If you selected the PMT Reference box, enter the ES Type to stream out the PID. This is the ES type that the PMT table points to. Enter the required parameters as defined by the MPEG standard PID Range Sessions NSG G allows to manually route various content elements to any output QAM channel. NSG G version and up allows to create PID range sessions. The PID Range option allows to break down the input stream into ranges and to multiplex them via various outputs while remapping the PIDs. To output a socket without any changes, that is without remapping and without generating tables, use the default PID range 0x0-0x1FFE. Defining a PID Range sessions, includes the following stages: Defining the input stream and PID ranges Associating the PID ranges with output QAMs The following table lists PID range specifications Table 6-22: PID Range Sessions Specifications Specification Input PID Range inputs Up to 2000 per device Up to 144 per input Output QAM Manager Broadcast only PID Range Output Up to 15 per QAM-RF Defining PID Ranges of the Input Stream 1. In Device Information, select the required device and verify that the firmware version is NSG G version 2.6 and higher. 2. In Details, select the PID Range Input tab. 3. Click Add to add a blank row in the PID Range Input tab Harmonic Inc. 163 MCT Version x, Rev B

167 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring Broadcast s 4. Configure the parameters as explained below: Table 6-23: PID Range Input Tab NSG IP Session ID Type Enable Backup Active Multicast GbE Port No. UDP Port Source IP Source Name PID Range Read only. The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG. Read only. A sequential number to indicate the number of the session in the current page. Indicates whether Primary or backup. Allows to enable backup session. Enable for backup ports only. See Configuring GbE Port Redundancy on page 136. By default the primary input socket is the active one. Once you enable a backup socket, check this option to activate the required socket. By default, Multicast is enabled. Select to enable multicast. If selected, the IP Address box is enabled. In GbE Port No., select the required input port. Once you define the required GbE port, the IP Address field is updated to display the IP address of the selected port. Enter the UDP port of the input GbE port Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket. Enter the name of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket. The name should be unique. Click to open the grid PID Range for Session #. See Table 6-24 on page 164. You can exclude PIDs reserved for NIT, SDT and EIT tables when creating PID range sessions. See Excluding Designated PIDs on page 165. Output QAMs Click to open the grid Output QAMs for Session #. See Table 6-25 on page Configuring PID Range s 1. Once you click the ellipsis under PID Range, at least one record appears. You can add ranges by clicking Add Range in the Editor group. 2. Configure the PID Range parameters according to the following explanation: NOTE: The default PID range 0x0-0x1FFE Table 6-24: PID Range s NSG IP The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG Harmonic Inc. 164 MCT Version x, Rev B

168 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring Broadcast s Table 6-24: PID Range s Session ID Index PID Range Start (Hex) PID Range Start (Dec) PID Range End (Hex) PID Range End (Dec) Read only. A sequential number to indicate the number of the session in the current page. Read only. A sequential number to indicate the number of the PID range in the current session. You can add up to 144 ranges per session. Enter, in hex, the first PID in the PID range Read only. Displays in decimal the value you have entered in PID Range Start (Hex). Enter, in Hex, the last PID in the PID range. Read only. Displays in decimal the value you have entered in PID Range End (Hex) Viewing the Output QAMs 1. Once you click the ellipsis under Output QAMs, you may view the output configuration of the PID Range output. You can view the parameters only after associating a PID range with an output. 2. View the output QAMs per input stream as explained below: Table 6-25: Output QAMs per Session (Input Stream) NSG IP RF Output QAM Frequency Source Name Ranges (Hex) PID Remapping Start (hex) PID Remapping End (hex) Read Only. The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG. Read Only. Indicates the RF output port. QAM manager should be Broadcast. Read Only. Indicates the frequency of the QAM. Read Only. Indicates the name of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket. The name is unique. Read Only. Indicates the range of the PID Range input session. It shows the start and end PIDs in hexa and in decimal. For example 0x0-0x1FFE (0-8190). Read Only. Indicates, in hex, the first remapped PID of the PID range. Read Only. Indicates, in hex, the last remapped PID of the PID range for the selected source Excluding Designated PIDs You can exclude PIDs reserved for NIT, SDT and EIT tables when creating PID range sessions. You need to add a range of PID range sessions. 1. Once you are configuring an Input PID session click under PID Range the Ellipses button Harmonic Inc. 165 MCT Version x, Rev B

169 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring Broadcast s The PID Range Session grid appears and the Add and Add Range buttons are enabled. Add and Add Range buttons are enabled PID Range Input Session # 2. Click Add Range. The following dialog appears: 3. Select the designated PIDs you wish to exclude from the range: NIT - PID 0x10, SDT - PID 0x11, EIT - PID 0x12 4. Click OK. 5. In the grid, rows are added according to your choice. For example, if you wish to exclude the PIDs designated for the NIT, SDT and ERT tables the following ranges are added: 0x0-F and 0x13-1FFF Defining PID Ranges of the Output Stream 1. In Device Information, select the required device and verify that the firmware version is NSG G version 2.6 and higher. 2. In Details, select the PID Range Output tab. 3. Click Add to add a blank row in the PID Range Output tab Harmonic Inc. 166 MCT Version x, Rev B

170 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring M-CMTS s 4. Configure the parameters as explained below: Table 6-26: PID Range Output Tab NSG IP RF Output QAM Frequency Source Name Ranges (hex) PID Remapping Start (hex) PID Remapping End (hex) Read only. The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG. Select the required RF output port. RF output port is indicated as follows x.y.z, where: x - indicates the slot y - indicates the RF port z - indicates the QAM Read only. Indicates the frequency of the QAM as defined in 6.12 Configuring TS Out s on page 156. Open the list and select the required input according to its source name configured in PID Range Input. See Table 6-23: PID Range Input Tab on page 164. The Ranges list is populated with the PID range session defined for the input. Open the list and select the required PID range of the selected session. Enter, in hexadecimal, the first remapped PID of the PID range. Enter, in hexadecimal, the last remapped PID of the PID range Configuring M-CMTS s NOTE: For NSG9000-6G - Applies to version 2.1 and up only. When the edgeqam is integrated in an M-CMTS system, do the following: Create an M-CMTS session by defining the QAM Manager as M-CMTS Configure the session - When you configure an M-CMTS session, you choose to output a socket without any changes, that is without remapping and without generating tables. To create an M-CMTS session 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the QAMs & TS tab. 3. For the required RF Output, open the QAM Manager list and select M-CMTS. A blank row appears in the M-CTS tab and you can start configuring the session. To configure an M-CMTS session 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the M-CTS tab Harmonic Inc. 167 MCT Version x, Rev B

171 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring M-CMTS s 3. Define the parameters as explained below. When you configure a session, select the required input port and route it to the required output as instructed below: Table 6-27: M-CMTS Session s NSG IP Session ID DTI Sync Restamping GbE Port No. IP Address. DOCSIS Sync Compensation L2TP Session ID Output QAM No. Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the number of the session in the current page. Relevant to primary DS channels only - To synchronize with the DTI time, select DTI Sync Restamping. The EdgeQAM re-stamps the DTI sync packets. To define the input GbE Port, enter the GbE Port, a number between 1-8. In unicast - Enter the IP address of the GbE input port. In multicast - Enter the multicast IP address. Relevant to primary DS channels only - In DOCSIS Sync Compensation, enter the sync compensation. The CMTS core router automatically inserts DOCSIS sync packets into the primary DS QAM channels. To ensure the accuracy of the DOCSIS sync packets, the EdgeQAM re-stamps them. Depending on RF network topology, it may be required to fine-tune the sync messages that flow over the various QAM channels of the EdgeQAM. The fine-tuning ensures consistent timing of CMs across all cable interfaces of the system. To fine-tune the sync offset across cable interfaces, use the DOCSIS Sync Compensation option. The sync offset units are ticks of the CMTS MHz clock, where 1 tick=97.6 nano-sec. The typical allowed offset difference between modems is +/- 6 ticks. To define the sync compensation value, measure the average Cable Modem (CM) timing offset difference (you can view the timing offset values via the CMTS console) and calculate the desired compensation value for the QAMs of the port. Typically, the compensation value of adjacent QAMs in the port is identical for each QAM in the port. To set an offset, see Setting DOCSIS Sync Compensation Offset on page 168. Enter the required session ID View the QAM number that outputs the session. Setting DOCSIS Sync Compensation Offset 1. In the M-CMTS tab, select the required M-CMTS sessions. 2. On the Home tab, in the Editor group, click Set Bulk Offset. 3. In Bulk Offset dialog, enter the required DOCSIS sync compensation offset. 4. Click Ok. The value of DOCSIS Sync Compensation of the selected session changes according to the required offset Harmonic Inc. 168 MCT Version x, Rev B

172 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring NGOD s 6.16 Configuring NGOD s NOTE: Applies to version 2.1 and up only. When the EdgeQAM is part of an NGOD system architecture, you need to configure the following to allow the QAM-RFs of the EdgeQAM to outflow SDV/VOD sessions: Configure and enable an NGOD ERM server as explained below. Define the NGOD ERM as the QAM-RF manager of the required QAM-RFs. See 6.12 Configuring TS Out s on page 156. To configure NGOD parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the NGOD tab. 1. Define the parameters as explained below. NOTE: To allow communication with the ERM, the NSG 9000 device supports the D6 and R6 NGOD protocols. When communicating using the R6 protocol, NSG is always listening on port 554(RTSP). Table 6-28: NGOD s NSG x & Up NSG IP Streaming Zone NGOD Component Name Bandwidth Update Threshold (kbps) Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Enter the streaming zone as defined in the D6 protocol Enter the component name as defined in the D6 protocol Define the allowed deviation from the current output bit rate of the device. Whenever the bit rate deviation reaches the value defined in this field, the NSG sends the ERM the updated output bit rate. Routing Cost Enter a value as defined in the D6 protocol (0-255). Enable ERM (D6) ERM IP Address ERM IP Port ERM Version ERM Keep Alive Connection Retry Threshold To enable the NSG 9000-ERM communication, select the Enable ERM (D6) box. Enter the ERM IP address Enter the ERM TCP port number Select the supported version of the protocol. Version 2 is the default version. Read only. A a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between the keepalive messages transmitted by the NSG to the ERM. The default is 30 seconds. Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between retrials to connect to the ERM to send D6 messages 2012 Harmonic Inc. 169 MCT Version x, Rev B

173 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring CAS s Table 6-28: NGOD s NSG x & Up Hold Time Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between responses to successive Keep Alive and or UPDATE messages received by the NSG. If the duration time elapses and a response is not received, NSG tries to re-establish the connection with the ERM Configuring CAS s The Conditional Access System (CAS) prevents unauthorized viewing of programs by scrambling services that later on can be decrypted using the correct decrypting key. NSG G supports the following CAS systems: DVB CAS - An encryption mode for the DVB protocol. Privacy Mode - An encryption mode developed by Motorola Inc. For Privacy Mode general overview and configuration, see Privacy Mode on page 103. The following table describes the CAS support of the various NSG G versions: Table 6-29: CAS Support of NSG G versions NSG G Version CAS Support Instructions Reference Version Privacy Mode scrambling General overview, see page 103. Configuration instructions, see page 170 Version 2.3 & up Privacy Mode scrambling DVB CAS Privacy Mode: General overview, see page 103. Configuration instructions, see page 170. DVB CAS - see page Selecting Encryption Mode By default the CAS mode is PM Scrambling. To change to DVB-CAS mode, do the following: 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select VOD tab > Encryption Mode parameter. 3. Open the Encryption Mode list and select DVB Scrambling. The configurable DVB Scrambling parameters which are arranged in the DVB CAS related tabs are enabled Configuring PM s 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the Privacy Mode tab Harmonic Inc. 170 MCT Version x, Rev B

174 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring CAS s 3. Configure the parameters as explained below: Table 6-30: Privacy Mode s NSG IP Enable PM CAS Clear To Scramble Transition (sec) VODS ID Warning - ECM Expiration Date (days) Alarm - ECM Expiration Date (days) ERS Synch Number ECM Next Callback Date Last ECM Update Date Stream Processing on ECM Expiration The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG. Select to enable encryption. Clear To Scramble Transition (sec). The unique ID of the VODS the NSG belongs to. The NSG issues a warning if the number of days that have passed since the expiration of the current callback is larger than the value indicated in this field. The NSG issues an alarm if the number of days that have passed since the expiration of the current callback is larger than the value indicated in this field. View only. The current ERS Synch Number. When this number changes, a new ECM is generated. The next time the MCT application needs to check whether a new ECM was generated. The last time the NSG was updated with a new ECM or callback. Select either of the following: Scramble with Last ECM - All NSGs of the VODS should be updated with the new ECM. Don t Scramble - do not scramble the stream Configuring DVB CAS DVB-CAS is applied in the following two options: Tier-based encryption - all VOD sessions are encrypted using a single ECM. Session-based encryption - default option. Every VOD session is encrypted using a dedicated control word, and requires its own ECM. Some of the DVB-CAS configuration parameters apply to both modes, while other parameters are relevant only to one of the modes Enabling CAS Mode To configure the DVB Scrambling parameters, select the DVB Scrambling mode. See Selecting Encryption Mode on page Harmonic Inc. 171 MCT Version x, Rev B

175 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring CAS s Defining DVB Scrambling s Once you selected the DVB Scrambling mode configure the DVB Settings. The following table lists the DVB Scrambling parameters: Table 6-31: DVB Scrambling s NSG IP Read only. Indicates the management IP address of the NSG G device. Enable DVB CAS EIS-SCS Port CP Duration (sec) ECMG Failover Retries CA Descriptor Location CAS Type Clear to Scramble Period Block Upon Failure Failed to Scramble Timeout Select to enable DVB CAS. Only once enabled, the DVB CAS configuration can be sent to the device. Define the TCP port through which NSG communicates with the EIS. Valid values range between The Crypto Period defines how often the NSG changes the control word (or "key") for encrypted services. The default CP duration is 15 seconds and you can enter the required value.valid values range between Define the number of times the NSG 9000 unit tries to establish communication with the Entitlement Control Message Generator (ECMG) before issuing the alarm ECMG Connection Failure. Select a location in the PMT for the CA descriptor. The CA descriptor may appear either in a service or elementary level or in both levels. Select either of the following: Session based - default option. The EIS is external and it issues an SCG for each service for which encryption is required. When selected, the DVB Session based features are enabled. Tier based - all services are scrambled with the same control word and ECM and there is no external EIS. Once selected, the DVB Tier Based features are enabled. Enter the clear time in seconds before starting to scramble the service, once the SCG is received. Valid values range between The default value is 0 seconds. Applies to DVB Tier based. Select Block Upon Failure, to allow the device to block the stream to protect the content. When a stream is blocked, no picture appears on the end user screen. This action takes place in case the NSG 9000 could not establish communication with the ECMG In Failed to Scramble Timeout (Sec), define the period of time between outputting the service and recognizing CAS failure. When CAS failure is recognized the following takes place: Scrambling with the last available ECM Block the stream. Applies in case ECM is not available and Block Upon Failure is selected. Outflow a clear stream. Applies in case ECM is not available and Block Upon Failure is not selected Harmonic Inc. 172 MCT Version x, Rev B

176 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring CAS s Table 6-31: DVB Scrambling s TS ID Provisioning Applies to DVB Session Based. In TS ID Provisioning, select how to generate the TS ID to be provisioned: Direct - The default option. The provisioned TS ID is the same as the output TS ID. By QAM Index - The provisioned TS ID is according to the QAM number that is a number between Configuring ECMs in DVB Tier Based Mode NSG G supports SimulCrypt in DVB Tier Based mode and it allows to encrypt the content with up to 3 different Conditional Access Systems. You can define up to three ECMs each with its own Access Criteria. Table 6-32: DVB CAS Tier Based NSG IP Active ECM PID SuperCAS ID (Hex) Access Criteria (Hex) The IP address of the device Select to enable the ECM record. Enter the ECM PID. Enter the Super CAS ID of the ECMG as provided by the vendor. Enter an access criteria as provided by the vendor Defining ECMGs and NSG 9000 Communication s This section instructs you on how to define the ECMG & NSG 9000 communication parameters. Table 6-33: ECMG and NSG G Communication s NSG IP ECMG No. Active Name SuperCAS ID The IP address of the device A sequential number of the ECMG device connected to the NSG. You can add up to 10 ECMGs. Select to enable the record. Enter the name of the ECMG brand. A 32-bit hexadecimal number that consists of the 16-bit CA vendor ID and an additional 16-bit number that distinguishes one ECM generator from another for the same CAS vendor. The super CAS ID determines which access criteria is coupled with each ECMG. The CAS vendor provides this value. Protocol Revision Specifies the CAS mode of operation. Select Revision 1, 2 or 3 for SimulCrypt Ver. 1, 2 or 3 respectively Harmonic Inc. 173 MCT Version x, Rev B

177 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Configuring SNMP s Table 6-33: ECMG and NSG G Communication s IP Address Port Channel ID The IP address of the ECMG. The CAS vendor provides this value. The number (in decimal format) of the TCP port used to connect the ECMG. The CAS vendor provides this value. Channel ID Indicates the channel of communication between the NSG and the ECMG Configuring SNMP s The Simple Network Management Protocol allows network management systems to communicate with network elements. By default the SNMP is enabled and you may disable it when required. The SNMP table allows you to create the following: A list of SNMP managers to receive messages from network elements. Once you have accomplished that, configure the SNMP Community String. To set password like strings for the various network elements. The default string value for the Get community is public. By configuring the SNMP Community string you actually set up different SNMP managers to monitor specific groups of devices. To set SNMP parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the SNMP tab. 3. Configure the parameters as explained below: Table 6-34: SNMP s NSG IP Address Enable Contact Location (SysLocation) Get Community Host 1 IP Address Host 1 Version The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG. By default SNMP is enabled. Verify that it is enabled. To disable SNMP, de-select Enable SNMP. Enter contact information Enter the location of the device. In other words, the location of the host on which the SNMP agent, or server runs. The name of the community having Read access to the network elements. The elements will respond to this community Get commands. The default string is public. Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG. Open the Version list and select the required SNMP version Harmonic Inc. 174 MCT Version x, Rev B

178 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Device Authentication Table 6-34: SNMP s Enable Host 1 Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG. NOTE: You can define up to four hosts. For licensing information, see 3.13 Retrieving Licensing Information on page Device Authentication NSG 9000 may use a Remote Authentication Dial In User Service (RADIUS) server to authenticate and authorize users who are trying to log into the NSG To configure RADIUS username and password for a mass of devices, use the Authentication tab. To configure the RADIUS username and password for a single device, use the Authentication tab per device. NOTE: If you entered authentication details in both Authentication tab of the device and the MCT Ribbon Authentication tab, access is granted according to the details entered in the Authentication tab of the device. To enable the RADIUS authentication, the following should apply: Connection to a RADIUS server - NSG is defined as a client of the RADIUS server NSG 9000 is configured to work in Remote mode The RADIUS server database should include three types of authorized NSG users. Any user defined in the RADIUS server must belong to one of these groups: Admin Config Guest To set Authentication parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device and verify that the firmware version is NSG G version 2.6 and higher. 2. In Details, select the Authentication tab. 3. Configure the parameters as explained below: Table 6-35: SNMP s NSG IP The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG Harmonic Inc. 175 MCT Version x, Rev B

179 Chapter 6 Configuring NSG G Device Authentication Table 6-35: SNMP s Authentication Type Username Password RADIUS Server IP RADIUS Port RADIUS Secret RADIUS Timeout Open the Authentication Type list and select either of the following: Local - authentication and authorization is performed locally, against the database of the NSG G Remote-RADIUS - authentication and authorization is performed by the RADIUS server. When selected, move to the following step to configure the required parameters. Enter the username as defined on the RADIUS server Enter the password as defined on the RADIUS server Enter the IP address of the RADIUS server Enter the port number over which the RADIUS sever communicates with the NSG Enter a confidential string that is shared between the device and the RADIUS server. Enter in seconds, the time allowed to elapse between an NSG 9000 request and a response from the RADIUS server Harmonic Inc. 176 MCT Version x, Rev B

180 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Overview Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G 7.1 Overview Configure the devices via the tabs of the Details section. The tabs and their attributes appear as per the version selected as the expected version. The following sections describe the tabs and their attributes according to the most recent available version. 7.2 Setting NSG Platform s on page Configuring Management Port on page Configuring Ethernet Ports on page Configuring the Input Ports of NSG G on page Configuring/Viewing RF Module s on page Configuring/Viewing RF Ports s on page Configuring TS Out s on page Configuring the VOD Application on page Configuring SDV s on page Configuring ISA-Device Communication on page Defining Virtual Devices on page Setting Device Time and Date on page Configuring Network Routing s on page Configuring Broadcast s on page Configuring M-CMTS s on page Configuring NGOD s on page Configuring CAS s on page Configuring SNMP s on page Setting NSG Platform s Defining the Platform tab parameters is a one time procedure you should do as you start configuring the device via MCT. To set platform parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Device Details, select the Platform tab. 3. Define the parameters as explained below: 2012 Harmonic Inc. 177 MCT Version x, Rev B

181 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Setting NSG Platform s. Table 7-1: Platform s NSG G ETH1 IP MB Serial Number Chassis Serial Number Main Board FPGA Version LLC Version Power Supply 1 Power Supply 2 Force IGMPv2 Read only. Displays the IP address of the currently configured Eth1 port. The serial number of the main board The serial number of the chassis. Read only. The FPGA version as retrieved from the device. Read only. Indicates the embedded version of the controller Read only. Indicates power supply type as Table 7-2 on page 179 shows. Read only. Indicates power supply type as Table 7-2 on page 179 shows. To set the GbE management to support the IGMPv2 protocol only, select Force IGMP V2. NSG 9000 ignores any IGMPv3 messages and does not generate any IGMPv3 messages. Use DTI Clock From version 3.2 and up. Select to enslave NSG 9000 clock to the DTI clock. DTI Redundancy Mode To set the DTI port redundancy mode, open the Redundancy Mode list and select one of the following: Manual - you need to select the DTI port. No automatic switching/activation of ports is done, regardless of the status of the DTI ports. Automatic (no Auto Revert) - selecting the active port is completely automatic, without any intervention and without any preference of a specific port. If the active port fails, the standby port is activated and assumes the role of "active" as long as it is in normal state. If the latter fails, ports will be switched again. This switching can continue any number of times, without any preference of a specific port. Automatic (Auto Revert) - in this mode, the selected port (as defined in Selected Port) is always preferred over the other port. In case that the selected port fails, the standby port is automatically activated. Once the selected port is fixed, the NSG automatically switches back to the selected port. DTI Selected Port To select the active DTI port, open the Selected Port list and select either port 1 or 2. The Selected Port list is disabled if Automatic (no Auto Revert) is selected Harmonic Inc. 178 MCT Version x, Rev B

182 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring Management Port Table 7-1: Platform s NSG G Enable Syslog Syslog Server IP Address Enable HTTPS Enable HTTP Select to enable communication with the Syslog server. Enabled once Enable Syslog is selected. Enter the IP address of the Syslog server. Read only. By default this option is enabled to allow you to work in secure-mode using the HTTPS protocol. Read only. By default this option is enabled. User admin may disable it via the Web client of the device. Table 7-2: Power Supply Type Web Client Indication Power Supply Type Web Client Indication Comments AC 500/665W AC Verify that the actual working power supply is of 665W. Check the Harmonic part number on the power supply labeling. DC 500/665W DC Verify that the actual working power supply is of 665W. Check the Harmonic part number on the power supply labeling. AC DC AC DC 800W-Ven2 800W-Ven2 800W-Ven1 800W-Ven1 7.3 Configuring Management Port The IP address of the ETH ports or NSG G primary IP address is configured as part of the NSG G installation. However, when required, you may change the IP address settings. NOTE: Configure the IP address of ETH1 on a different subnet than that of ETH2. Configuring both ports to be on the same subnet may result in serious network communication problems. NSG G uses the ETH1 port to communicate with the network for management purposes and ETH2 for Conditional Access Systems (CAS) purposes. To change configuration of ETH1 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Device Details, select the Platform tab. 3. In Eth1, enter the required IP address. 4. Send to device Harmonic Inc. 179 MCT Version x, Rev B

183 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring Ethernet Ports To define additional parameters of the management port, see 7.4 Configuring Ethernet Ports on page Configuring Ethernet Ports 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Device Details, select the Management tab. 3. Define the parameters as explained below: Table 7-3: Eth1 s NSG G Eth1 IP MAC Address Eth1 Mask Gateway Enable Eth2 Eth2 IP Eth2 IP Mask DNS Server IP Address Read only. Displays the IP address of the currently configured Eth1 port. Read only. View the MAC address of the device. Enter the Mask address of the Eth1 port Enter the IP address of Eth1 gateway Click to enable Eth2 Enter Eth2 IP address Enter Eth2 Mask address Applies to NSG G version and up. Enter the IP of the Domain Name Server. This applies when the EdgeQAM is part of an NGOD system architecture. See 7.17 Configuring NGOD s on page Configuring the Input Ports of NSG G NSG G version 3.1 and up is furnished with eight GbE input ports. The GbE ports operate as eight independent ports receiving eight different feeds. The input rate of the GbE ports is as follows: GbE G GbE G/10G (configurable) NSG G version 3.0 supports four GbE input ports only Configuring GbE Port Redundancy Overview NSG G supports 1:1 and N:1 redundancy modes for its GbE input ports. Typical port redundancy configuration depends on the application in which the NSG is deployed as the following scenarios describe: VOD application - to allow redundancy for the IP unicast VOD streams, you should use 1:1 port redundancy. Select a distinct backup port for each primary port, with the Same IP Address option checked. In this case, only the primary port is active. SDV application - to allow redundancy for the IP mulicast SDV streams, use both 1:1 and N:1 redundancy modes: 2012 Harmonic Inc. 180 MCT Version x, Rev B

184 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring the Input Ports of NSG G 1:1 port redundancy - define for each primary port a backup port. De-select the Same IP Address option, and set a distinct IP address for the designated backup port. This mode ensures the highest level of protection against various network failures. N:1 port redundancy - allows an efficient use of the eight available input GbE ports, by utilizing a single backup port for protecting several primary ports. The typical and recommended configuration for this mode is to define two groups of 3 primary ports and one backup port. For example, port 4 backs up ports 1-3 and port 8 backs up ports 5-7. In case of a redundancy switch, the backup port starts transmitting also the streams of the failed primary port(s). If traffic on any given port is expected to exceed 0.5 Gbps, the backup port transmits the content of the first failed primary port only and overflow of the backup port is prevented. NOTE: Beware that GbE ports 1-4 are of 1G and GbE ports 5-8 are of either 1 or 10G. In general, the following guidelines apply for the port redundancy feature: A primary port cannot serve as a backup port If the Same IP Address option is selected, the backup port is greyed out. When the primary port fails, the backup port is activated, using the same IP address of the failed port. Configuring port redundancy, blocks the port configuration. In case Same IP Address is selected, the IP address of the backup port is automatically changed to the primary port IP address. NOTE: Verify that the capacity of the backup port matches or exceeds the actual capacity of the primary port. Alarm configuration: By default both Link Down and No Input Traffic alarms trigger port redundancy. The alarm configuration of the primary port and backup port is the same. You can configure the alarms of a primary port only. When selecting a backup Port, the alarm configuration of the primary port also applies to the backup port. In N:1 port redundancy, the alarm configuration applies to the backup port and to all of the primary ports it backs up. Once you configure the backup port to backup an additional primary port, the alarm configuration automatically applies to the primary port. Any changes to the alarm configuration immediately applies to the backup port and to all primary ports it backs up. To configure the NSG G GbE ports 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the GbE tab. 3. Enter the required values according to the following provided information: NOTE: NGOD Input Group Name and Backup port apply to version 2.1 and up only. Table 7-4: GbE Port s for NSG G NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH Harmonic Inc. 181 MCT Version x, Rev B

185 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring the Input Ports of NSG G Table 7-4: GbE Port s for NSG G GbE No. Enable Port Speed Auto Negotiation IP Address IP Mask Route Refresh Refresh Interval NGOD Input Group Name NGOD Assigned Bandwidth(Mbps) Backup Port Read only. Displays the number of the active port. Switching mode - each GbE port has its own row and both ports are active. Check the box to enable the port. If you clear the box, the port does not admit input even if the other parameters are configured properly. Switching mode - Check the box for each port to enable both ports. Applies to 10GbE only (GbE5-GbE8). Open the list and select the required speed. Changes to the speed, require device reboot: 1Gbps 10Gbps Applies to 1G speed. When Same IP is checked, you cannot apply Auto Negotiation. Controls (for each GbE channel separately) whether Auto Negotiation is activated. Auto Negotiation is a handshake protocol used in GbE links. Check this option if the other end of the GbE link (typically a GbE switch) also uses Auto Negotiation. Otherwise, the box must be cleared. Activating Auto Negotiation while communicating with a device that does not use it causes communication problems. The IP address of the GbE 1 port. When the QAM Mapping Mode is other than Normal, the IP address is updated to reflect the selected QAM mapping mode. The subnet mask. If checked, the NSG routinely sends "Ping" requests to the gateway of the GbE port. Requests are sent approximately once per 10 seconds, thus preventing expiration of the route. Define, in Msec, how often to send a Ping request. Enter the name of the input group according to the D6 standard. Applies to NSG G version 3.1 and up. Enter the bandwidth of the GbE port assigned for the NGOD ERM. The default is 1000MB for both 1G and 10G GbE ports. If the assigned bandwidth is 1000M/10,000M the full capacity of the 1G/ 10G port is assigned for the NGOD ERM, respectively. You can enter a value between /0-10,000 in increments of 100, respectively. If you enter 0, the GbE port is not available for the NGOD ERM. If required, select a backup port. If port X is the backup of port Y, port X cannot have a backup port. However, a port may serve as a backup to more than one primary port. Note: Configure port redundancy only when no sessions are provisioned to the port Harmonic Inc. 182 MCT Version x, Rev B

186 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring/Viewing RF Module s Table 7-4: GbE Port s for NSG G Same IP Trigger Link Down Trigger No Input Traffic In VOD application - to allow redundancy for IP unicast VOD streams, you should use 1:1 port redundancy. Select a distinct backup port for each primary port, with the Same IP Address option checked. Once you select Same IP Address the following takes place: The IP address of the backup port changes to the IP address of the primary port The backup port is disabled The routing tables of the primary port are copied to the backup port routing tables. Once Same IP Address is unchecked, the routing tables of the backup port are removed. By default Link Down is checked and when the alarm is raised, it triggers port redundancy. Uncheck if Link Down should not trigger redundancy. By default No Input Traffic is checked and when the alarm is raised, it triggers port redundancy. Uncheck, if No Input Traffic should not trigger redundancy. 7.6 Configuring/Viewing RF Module s Once you read information from the device, the RF Module tab updates to display information about each slot and the installed module. Thus, some of the parameters of the RF Module tab are read only. You can also define global RF module parameters. The available 24 QAM-RF channels of each RF port are divided into groups. The QAM channels of each group share the same configuration: ITU-T Annex, constellation, symbol rate and interleaver. Group configuration applies to both RF ports of the module. Currently the default groups are: Table 7-5: Available QAM-RF Groups Group ITU-T Annex Operation Mode 2x4 QAM-RF channels 1x9 QAM-RF channels 2x6 QAM-RF channels 1x12 QAM-RF channels A B 4A-4A-9A 6B-6B-12B To view and configure RF module parameters 1. Read information from the device (Select the device and click Get from Device.) 2. Select the RF Module tab. 3. View/configure the following information: Table 7-6: RF Module tab - NSG G NSG IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH Harmonic Inc. 183 MCT Version x, Rev B

187 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring/Viewing RF Module s Table 7-6: RF Module tab - NSG G Slot No. Actual Card Expected Card Serial Number Operation Mode RF Template Group 1 Annex Group 1Constellation Group 1Symbol Rate Read only. Displays the slot in of the RF module, usually a number between 1-9. Read only. Indicates the actual module type. NSG-40G supports the NSG-8R1G card type. This is an octal card that supports up to eight QAM-RF channels per RF port. Read only. Indicates the configured module type. Read only. The serial number of the mounted module. This field is populated after Get from Device only. Open the list and select the required QAM-RFs group. The default is 6B-6B-12B Open the list to select the required RF template: Frequency - frequency is entered explicitly as numeric frequency values EIS-STD - frequency is defined using channel numbers based on the EIA-STD channel table. See EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps on page 208. EIA-HRC - RF settings are entered using channel numbers based on the EIA-HRC channel table. See EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps on page 208. When changing the RF Template to EIS-STD or EIA-HRC, MCT checks if the frequencies of each port matches the EIA table. If not, a message appears notifying that all frequencies are set to the default frequency according to the EIA channel. In addition, all RF Ports are disabled. Select the required ITU-T Annex: Annex-A (DVB) - this mode is used mainly in European and Asian countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 8 MHz per QAM-RF channel. Annex-B - this is the mode used in North-American countries. Utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel. Annex-C (Japan) as implied by its name, used mainly in Japan. Similar to Annex-A in the most part, but utilizes bandwidth of 6 MHz per QAM-RF channel. To define the required constellation, open the Constellation list. The Constellation is the type of Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) used. QAM constellation affects Data Rate and Symbol Rate, and must be set according to HFC network properties. Valid values are: Annex-A or Annex-C 16, 32, 64, 128, 256 Annex-B 64 and 256 Define/view the rate of QAM symbols that are encoded and transmitted per second. You can define the symbol rate in Annex A and C. In Annex B, you can only view its value Harmonic Inc. 184 MCT Version x, Rev B

188 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring/Viewing RF Ports s Table 7-6: RF Module tab - NSG G Group 1Interleaver 1 View the interleaver values as defined in the QAM tab. NSG 9000 has two optional Interleaver values, set the required value for this interleaver. Group 1Interleaver 2 See Interleaver 1 Group 2 Annex Group 2 Constellation Group 2 Symbol Rate See Group 1 Annex See Group 1 Constellation See Group 1 Symbol rate Group 2 Interleaver 1 See Group 1 Interleaver 1 Group 2 Interleaver 2 See Group 1 Interleaver 2 Group 3 Annex Group 3 Constellation Group 3 Symbol Rate See Group 1 Annex See Group 1 Constellation See Group 1 Symbol Rate Group 3 Interleaver 1 See Group 1 Interleaver 1 Group 3 Interleaver 2 See Group 1 Interleaver Configuring/Viewing RF Ports s Each RF Port spans across 384MHz transmission frequency of the 1GHz spectrum (to be accurate 50MHZ-1GHz). You can locate along the spectrum, for each RF port, its Span window = 384MHz divided into steps of 6MHz for Annex B or 8MHz for Annex A. You can set the Span window with accuracy of up to 1Khz along the 1GHz spectrum. For example Once you defined the Span window, locate the available QAM channels along this span window while each QAM channel utilizes six MHz in Annex B. For example, if the Span Window = 384 MHz and Span Start = 228 MHz, you can configure QAM channels with any frequency between 228Mhz MHz. However, the frequency of the QAM channels is defined according to the center frequency. In this case, the first QAM channel valid frequency 2012 Harmonic Inc. 185 MCT Version x, Rev B

189 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring/Viewing RF Ports s is 231MHz in steps of 6MHz. For example: 231, 237, 243 You can locate the QAMs any where along the Span window. For example, QAM #4 can be located at 255MHz. For Annex B, QAM frequency is calculated according to the following formula: fqam = SpanStart + 3MHz + n*6mhz <SpanEnd n={0...63} For Annex A, QAM frequency is calculated according to the following formula: fqam = SpanStart + 4MHz + n*8mhz <SpanEnd n={0...47} When Span window moves, all the allocated QAMs move accordingly. So if e.g. the window moves by +1Mhz, all allocated QAMs shift by +1Mhz. To view and configure RF port parameters 1. Read information from the device (Select the device and click Get from Device.) 2. Select the RF Port tab. 3. View/configure the following information: Table 7-7: RF Port tab - NSG G NSG IP Slot No. Port No. RF Enable #QAMs per Port Frequency Range Start (MHz) Frequency Range End(MHz) Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Read only. Displays the slot in of the RF module, usually a number between 1-9. This is a linked parameter. Click it to view/configure slot parameters. Read only. Displays the RF port number. Select to enable the RF port. Enable the port only after completing the output configuration. Available if Optimized ACP is not selected. Select the number of QAM channels that can be activated, turned On/Off. For Annex B, select QAM channels from 1-24, for Annex A, select between To decrease the number of QAMs per channel, indicate specifically the QAMs you wish to mute. See QAM On in Table 7-8 on page 187. Select # QAMs per port according to your future upgrade of network path. The # of power lever per QAM depends on the # QAMs per port. To locate the span window, along the spectrum, enter the Span Start and Span End To locate the span window, along the spectrum, enter the Span Start and Span End 2012 Harmonic Inc. 186 MCT Version x, Rev B

190 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring TS Out s Table 7-7: RF Port tab - NSG G Optimized ACP Power Level Per QAM (dbmv) Power Level Per QAM (dbuv) To apply ACP (Adjacent Channel Protection), select this option. If ACP is applied, # QAMs per Port, is disabled. The device automatically balances the RF gain chain according to the number of currently active QAMs. However, if you mute a channel, while Optimized ACP is selected, a momentary disruption to video on other channels may ensue. Define the QAM power level for all QAM channels within the port. View the allowed range next to the Power Level Per QAM box Read only. Indicates the RF power level in dbuv. Once you enter the power level per QAM in dbmv, this parameter is updated to display the power level also in dbuv. Applies to NSG G version and up. Enable Variable Equalizer Select Variable Equalizer to enable the Cable Attenuation option. Cable Attenuation (db) To yield the best frequency flatness at the end of the cable, open the Cable Attenuation list and select a value where the cable attenuation provides pre-emphasis to high frequencies. To flatten the residual frequency ripple/ tilt, refer to User Attenuation in Table 7-8 on page Configuring TS Out s MCT creates a record for each transport stream. MCT allocates for each port a maximum of 24 QAM numbers. To define the out TS parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the QAM & TS tab. 3. Define the parameters as explained in the following table. Table 7-8: TS Out s - NSG G Field NSG IP QAM Index Slot No. Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Read only. Displays the number of the QAM channels of the QAM-RF module in a sequential order from Currently, the QAMs are listed in groups of 24 with jumps of 12 QAMs in between each group. Read only and a linked parameter. Indicated the number of the slot on which the module is mounted Harmonic Inc. 187 MCT Version x, Rev B

191 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring TS Out s Table 7-8: TS Out s - NSG G Port Number QAM No. Field Read only and a linked parameter. Each QAM-RF module has two ports. This field indicates the QAM-RF port number. For QAM-RF port arrangement, see NSG 9000 Installation and Hardware User s Guide. Read only. Displays the QAM channel in a sequential order in relation to the QAM channels in the port, from # QAMs Per Port A linked parameter. Indicates the number of QAM channels, from 1-24 Annex B, or 1-17 Annex A, that can be activated, turned On/ Off. TS ID The ID number of the Transport Stream ranging from 1-> This ID serves in the PAT (Program Allocation Table) of the given TS, to comply with the DVB standard. Group (Annex/ Constellation/SR) QAM Manager Serv. Area EIA Type EIA Channel RF Freq. (MHz) User Attenuation(dB) Interleaver Read only. Indicates the group this TS belongs to in the following pattern: Group number (Annex/Constellation/Symbol Rate) The QAM manager determines the functionality of the QAM. The default QAM manager is VOD SRM. You can select one of the QAM managers listed in the QAM Manager table, see Table 7-9: QAM Manager on page 189. Indicates the area this transport stream serves. This value is provided by the vendor and may help you when exporting this database to NMX template. Once you export this database to NMX template, you can monitor the serving area and generate statistical reports. Note: If you use Create SAT, serving area should be up to 16bits (range of ). See Table 7-10 on page 190. Read only, linked parameter. Displays the EIA type as configured in the RF Module tab. The default entry. It indicates the channel number for the RF as defined in the EIA standard. When N/A appears, it indicates that the RF frequency does not comply with the frequencies defined by the EIA. By default, indicates the RF frequency according to the EIA channel number configured in EIA Freq. You can define another required frequency and then N/A appears in EIA Freq. The entered frequency should be divisible by 100. To flatten the residual frequency ripple/tilt, open the list and select the required value. The available range is between 0-2 db with steps of 0.1dB. The Interleaver settings determine the robustness of the QAM signal to transmission errors. Recommended values are: ANNEX-A and ANNEX C: In ANNEX-B, Interleaver value depens on the constellation Constellation 64: 128-1, constellation 256: 128-4, Harmonic Inc. 188 MCT Version x, Rev B

192 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring TS Out s Table 7-8: TS Out s - NSG G Spectral Inversion QAM On CW PM Enable Field NGOD QAM Group Name The spectral inversion is an advanced QAM configuration parameter. If checked, spectral inversion is enabled By default the QAM is on and outputting streams. To close the QAM, de-select the required QAM On box. Select for testing purposes only. Enabled if QAM On is selected. Check to enable Motorola Privacy mode for this TS. Enter the QAM-group name that the NSG reports on via its NGOD-D6 messages. Table 7-9: QAM Manager QAM-RF Manager VOD SRM (default) NGOD ERM ISA SRM Pass Through (not supported) Application VOD Service & PID Remux VOD SDV Service & PID Remux SDV VOD Service & PID Remux Pass Through VOD - the NSG 9000 automatically detects the incoming streams and automatically routes them, according to the indicated UDP, to the required QAM- RF channel. The traffic routed via the QAM-RFs is controlled by the SRM (Session Resource Manager). The SRM may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID remux. The NGOD ERM controls the QAM-RFs for binding SDV sessions and for routing VOD sessions. The ERM may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID remux. All QAM-RFs send D6 messages to the NGOD ERM if NGOD ERM server is configured and enabled by selecting Applications > NGOD. All QAM-RFs are controlled by ISA (Interactive Service Architecture) using the RPC protocol. VOD sessions are provisioned via ISA or by autodetection. The ISA may also route to the QAM-RFs service remux or PID remux. The incoming stream is streamed out without any changes, that is without generating new tables, services or PIDs. The traffic is locally routed (device Passthrough manager) to the QAM-RFs as indicated by the UDP port. M-CMTS M-CMTS The QAM-RFs deliver M-CMTS data and are controlled by the CMTS. D2E (not supported) D2E The D2E server controls the QAMs. Future use only Harmonic Inc. 189 MCT Version x, Rev B

193 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring the VOD Application NOTE: To change a QAM Manager, verify that no session, service or PID are provisioned/remuxed to this QAM-RF. 7.9 Configuring the VOD Application Configure VOD parameters when the NSG G device serves as a highly integrated digital video gateway, capable of multiplexing on-demand content streamed over an IP network. To configure VOD parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device 2. In Details, select the VOD tab. 3. Configure the parameters as explained below: Table 7-10: VOD s - NSG G NSG IP Encryption Mode Emulation Template Service ID Base Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Select either of the following: DVB Scrambling - standard scrambling method PM Scrambling - Motorola s scrambling method Note: currently only PM scrambling is available. By default, for VOD streams, autodetected is enabled and the streams are multiplexed to the required QAM, according to the UDP port number. However, you can set the QAM mapping method as follows: Normal 10/6 - according to this QAM mapping the 10MSB indicate the designated QAM-RF output and the 6LSB the output service ID. Thus, the allowed ranges are: QAM-RF , Service ID NSG G - a QAM mapping that allows NSG G to emulate six NSG G devices. Custom - you can prepare your own QAM mapping file and load it to the NSG. The streams are out flowing according to the QAM mapping defined in the customized file. You can edit the file via MCT Options. See 3.12 Creating Custom QAM Mapping File on page 60. Note: Any changes to the Custom file requires to import it to the device. Virtualization (8/8 bits) - according to this QAM mapping the 8MSB indicate the designated QAM-RF output and the 8LSB the output service ID. Thus, the allowed ranges are: QAM-RF 0-255, Service ID Enter the first service in the mapping range. The default is Harmonic Inc. 190 MCT Version x, Rev B

194 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring the VOD Application Table 7-10: VOD s - NSG G PID Remapping From PID (Hex) To PID (Hex) PAT Interval PMT Interval Update PMT Version Create SAT Original Network ID (Hex) Serving Area Location in SAT Auto Detection Session Inactivity Teardown Threshold (sec) You may choose either the Paradigm (e.g. set formula) or the Random options to govern the method elementary streams are remapped and transmitted. The chosen option will take affect only after resetting the NSG. See, PID Remapping Options on page 85. Available only when Random is selected. This is the lower limit of the PID range and is written in hexadecimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0. Available only when Random is selected. This is the upper limit of the PID range and is written in hexadecimal format. The range of acceptable values is 0x21 to 0x1FF0. Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PAT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams. Determines the frequency (in milliseconds) at which PMT packets are sent over the NSG's output transport streams. The allowed range is ms. The value chosen must be divisible by 66 and if not, the NSG will round up or down to the closest divisible decimal value. Select Update PMT Version to update the PMT version. This version is incremented every time the PMT s data is changed (e.g. the Video PID changes). Select Create SAT (Service Area Table), to create SAT at the output. Once Create SAT is selected, the following parameters are enabled: Original Network ID Serving Area Location in SAT Note: To create SAT, serving area should be up to 16bits (range of ). See Table 7-8 on page 187. If Create SAT is selected, define the original network ID. If Create SAT is selected, open the Serving Area Location in SAT list and select one of the following: TS ID - the serving area is written to the TS ID. First Service Name - the serving area is written to the first service name Both - the serving area is written to both the TS ID and the first service name. Check to allow auto detected VOD sessions. Enter the allowed duration, in seconds, for session inactivity before the session is removed from the output Harmonic Inc. 191 MCT Version x, Rev B

195 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring SDV s 7.10 Configuring SDV s NSG 9000 supports service redundancy that is activated once the device does not detect the service at the input port. Service redundancy is supported in either of the following methods: Hot - NSG 9000 JOINs both the primary multicast group and the backup multicast group. Both primary and backup services are at the input to allow short fail-over time. Warm - NSG 9000 JOINS the primary multicast group only. Once the device does not detect the service at the input, it JOINs the backup multicast group and the fail-over time is longer. To define SDV redundancy parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the SDV tab. 3. Configure the following parameters: Table 7-11: SDV Redundancy parameters NSG IP NGOD Redundancy Mode ISA Redundancy Mode Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Select one of the following modes: Hot/Warm - the default option. The service has only one redundant service. NSG 9000 JOINs the primary service, and upon failure, JOINs the backup multicast group. As a result, the backup service is streamed from the switch to the input port of the device. Hot/Hot - the service has one redundant service. NSG 9000 JOINs both the primary and backup multicast groups and both groups are steamed to the device. Upon failure, the device inputs the backup service resulting in a short fail-over time. Hot/Warm/Warm - the service has at least two redundant services. NSG 9000 JOINs the primary multicast group. Upon failure NSG 9000 JOINs the first backup service and as a result the backup service is streamed into the device. If this trial fails, NSG 9000 JOINs the second backup multicast group. Hot/Hot/Hot - the service has at least two redundant services. NSG 9000 JOINs all three multicast groups. All three services are streamed to the input port to allow short fail-over time. See NGOD Redundancy Mode explanation. Currently disabled Configuring ISA-Device Communication To receive streams provisioned by ISA, set the following parameters. 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the ISA tab Harmonic Inc. 192 MCT Version x, Rev B

196 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring ISA-Device Communication 3. Configure the following parameters: Table 7-12: NSG G and ISA SRM communication Firmware Version N/A Eth1 Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. N/A Enable Reset Indication If selected, an indication is sent to the ISA server (either ERM or SRM) upon reset. N/A SRM IP Address Enter the IP address of the SRM server. N/A Timeout Period Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between the NSG trials to connect to the ISA server. N/A Up to version 3.1 Ver. 3.1 Report PMT Section (QuerySessionInfo) Input Port for Shell Session Input Port for Shell Session 2 SDV Load-sharing Port A SDV Load-sharing Port B When selected, in QuerySessionInfo, the PMT packet data is sent to the ISA server. Applies to SDV sessions. The input port in the provisioning message is not indicated. The edgeqam attempts to receive the input stream via the input port indicated in the Input Port for Shell Session box. The default port is port 1. Optional configuration. Configure this parameter when SDV traffic exceeds 1Giga. In this case, the NSG manages the traffic between both input ports for SDV session. The NSG sends the sessions to the input port for SDV session with less traffic. If both ports are equally loaded with traffic, the device sends the traffic to the port defined as the first input port for Shell sessions. Applies to SDV sessions. The input port in the provisioning message is not indicated. The edgeqam attempts to receive the input stream via the input port indicated in this field. The default port is port 1. Optional configuration. Configure this parameter when SDV traffic exceeds 1Giga. In this case, the NSG manages the traffic between both input ports for SDV session. The NSG sends the sessions to the input port for SDV session with less traffic. If both ports are equally loaded with traffic, the device sends the traffic to the port defined as the first input port for SDV sessions Harmonic Inc. 193 MCT Version x, Rev B

197 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Defining Virtual Devices Table 7-12: NSG G and ISA SRM communication Firmware Version Ver. 3.2 and up N/A SDV Load-Sharing Port A - D Enable Announce Message Applies to ISA-SDV sessions. The input port in the provisioning message is not indicated. The edgeqam attempts to receive the input stream via the input ports indicated in the SDV Load-Sharing Port A-D boxes. The default port is GbE port 1, indicated in SDV Load-Sharing Port A. You can configure up to four GbE input ports to handle up to four Gigabytes of SDV traffic. The NSG manages the traffic between the selected input ports. The NSG sends the sessions to the input port for SDV session with less traffic. If SDV ports are equally loaded with traffic, the device sends the traffic to the ports according to the sequential order of the port numbers. NOTE: The number of the ports should be in a sequential order from one to eight. Port number can be 0 only if the number of the following SDV port is 0 as well. SDV Load-Sharing Port A cannot be 0. NOTE: GbE input port that is selected as an SDV-load sharing port, cannot be a backup port. Check to enable the announce message indication required by the ISA and the RCAS protocols. This message is sent to the SRM due to the following: Provisioning a service Alarm is raised on the session A redundancy switch over the session source Session is missing from the output 7.12 Defining Virtual Devices The virtual device feature allows either of the following: VOD - allows to use UDP QAM mapping of legacy NSG devices with NSG G as the edgeqam. ISA server - allows the ISA server to handle the full capacity of QAM-RFs of the edgqam. To create virtual IPs, do the following unless you are using the physical management port IP or the physical GbE port IP for the virtual devices: Eth1 Virtual IPs - You can add virtual IPs to ETh1 only. Eth1 virtual IPs should be on a subnet other than Eth2 subnet. You can add up to 18 Eth1 virtual IPs. GbE Virtual IPs - You can add GbE virtual IPs to any of the active GbE ports. You can add up to 10 GbE virtual IPs. NOTE: In VOD - each GbE port has a unique QAM mapping scheme. In ISA - all GbE ports share the same QAM mapping. Create virtual devices Creating Virtual Management IPs 1. In Device Information, select the required device Harmonic Inc. 194 MCT Version x, Rev B

198 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Defining Virtual Devices 2. In Details, select the Eth1 Virtual IPs tab. 3. Click Add. A blank row is added to the table. 4. Configure the following parameters: Table 7-13: NSG G Eth1 Virtual IPs NSG IP Index Virtual IP Mask Status Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs. Enter the virtual Ethernet port IP address. Virtual IP should be unique. Enter a subnet mask In Status, view the status of the Eth1 virtual IP: In Use - the virtual IP is currently in use No in Use - the virtual IP is currently not in use Creating GbE Virtual IP 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the GbE Virtual IPs tab. 3. Click Add. A blank row is added to the table. 4. Configure the following parameters: Table 7-14: NSG G GbE Virtual IPs NSG IP Index GbE Port Virtual IP Mask Management IP Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs. Enter the GbE port number. Enter the virtual GbE IP address. You can add up to 10 GbE virtual IPs. You can also select Enter the required mask IP View the management IP of the virtual GbE port Creating Virtual Devices 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the Virtual Devices tab. The Sort button is enabled. See page Click Add. A blank row is added to the table Harmonic Inc. 195 MCT Version x, Rev B

199 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Defining Virtual Devices 4. Configure the following parameters: Table 7-15: NSG G Version 3.1 and up Virtual Devices NSG IP Virtual Device Index Eth1 Virtual IP VOD/ISA Mode GbE Port: Virtual IP Bitmap/Encoded QAM Mapping Virtual Input Port Enable Reset Indication Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs. Open the list and select the required virtual management port. The list is propagated with the Eth1 virtual IPs created previously. Open the QAM Manager list and select the required QAM manager. Select either VOD, for VOD systems and ISA for ISA SRM systems. In case of ISA, all GbE ports share the same QAM mapping scheme. In case of VOD, each GbE port has its unique QAM mapping scheme. Open the list and select the required virtual GbE port. The list is propagated with GbE IPs that you can use as GbE virtual IPs. The GbE interface appears in the following format: <x>:<virtual GbE IP>, where x is the physical GbE port of the edgeqam, an integer between 1-8. Select the required GbE interface. To allow load balancing, select 0-Load Balancing. In ISA, only Encoded is available. In VOD, select one of the following methods to present the output: Bitmap- each of the MSB bits represents an Output TS of the NSG. The Output TS is determined by the bit that is set to 1. For example, TS 8 is represented by , TS 3 by and TS 9 by Encoded - the Output TS is determined by the numeric value of the MSB. For example, TS 8 is represented by , TS 3 by and TS 9 by Click to open a subsection - ISA QAM Mapping for Virtual Device #. See Table 7-16 on page 197. Applies to ISA SRM only. Enter the required port according to the ISA provisioning. Applies to ISA SRM only. In Enable Reset Indication, check to enable this message required by the RPC protocol for the virtual device. This message is sent to the SRM who manages the device, after device reset or after management communication is back in case of communication problems. By default this parameter is off Harmonic Inc. 196 MCT Version x, Rev B

200 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Setting Device Time and Date Table 7-15: NSG G Version 3.1 and up Virtual Devices Reset Ind. Mac Address Applies to ISA SRM only. Reset Ind. MAC Addr. - the MAC Address of the management port of the device/virtual device. This MAC address appears in the Reset Indication message only to identify the device. Once you click Enable Reset Indication, the Reset Ind. MAC Address is calculated as follows: Reset Indication MAC Address First two bytes = First two bytes of the Eth1 MAC address Four last bytes= The IP address of the Eth1/virtual Eth1 in hexadecimal. For example: Reset Indication is 00:90:0a:28:17:b1, where: 00:90 - derived from the MAC address of Eth1, which is 00:90:F0:02:12:A8 0a:28:17:b1 - the IP address of the virtual Eth1, which is In hex = 0a:28:17:b1. Table 7-16: QAM Mapping NSG IP Virtual Device Index QAM Mapping Index Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. A sequential number to indicate the listed virtual IPs. A sequential number to indicate the QAM index per virtual device. Virtual QAM In Virtual QAM, enter the QAM number (1-255) in the provisioning message. The UDP Port Range is automatically displayed. Physical QAM UDP Port Range In Physical QAM, enter the physical QAM to output the content. Indicate the physical QAM in the following pattern: x.y.z, where x - module number, an integer between 1-9 y - port number, an integer between 1-2 z - QAM channel number, an integer between 1-24 Applies to VOD only. Once you enter the virtual QAM, the UDP port range is automatically displayed Setting Device Time and Date 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the Time tab Harmonic Inc. 197 MCT Version x, Rev B

201 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring Network Routing s 3. Configure the parameters as explained below: Table 7-17: Device Time s NSG IP Enable NTP NTP Server IP Address Enable Daylight Saving Time Offset Location City/Province Read Only. Displays the IP address of Eth1 port Select to allow to establish communication with the NTP server, select Enable NTP. Enter the IP address of the NTP server. Select to enable daylight saving time. Once selected, Location and City/Province attributes are enabled. The daylight saving time is automatically defined according to the selected location and city/province. Available when Enable Daylight Saving is not selected. Open the Time Offset list and select the required local time offset to match between the time of the device, that is UTC time, and the Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). Select the required location. Select the required city/province Configuring Network Routing s Once you add an NSG device, 20 blank routing records appear in the Routing tab for each GbE/Eth port. Define routing records when you need the NSG to communicate with components, such as CAS, that are not included in the NSG's subnet. You can define up to 20 routing IP addresses for each NSG. NOTE: You cannot configure a routing table for a port that serves as a backup port with Same IP enabled. See Configuring GbE Port Redundancy on page 180. To configure network route parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the Routing tab. 3. Configure the required parameters as explained below: Table 7-18: Network Routing s NSG IP Routing No. Active Destination Displays the IP address of ETH1. An index number for each routing record. Select to activate the route. To deactivate the route, de-select the. Once you activate the route, you can set its parameters. Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the IP address of the destination device Harmonic Inc. 198 MCT Version x, Rev B

202 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring Broadcast s Table 7-18: Network Routing s Mask Gateway Interface Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the subnet mask. Enabled once Active is selected. Enter the IP address of the gateway. The gateway must be in the same subnet as the NSG ETH2 port. Select the port the routing is associated with. You can select one of the following: Eth1/2, GbE Configuring Broadcast s In Broadcast application mode, NSG G allows to manually route various content elements to any output QAM channel. NSG G allows to create the following types of sessions: Service Remux - to route specific MPEG services (programs) using the Service Remux tab PID Remux - to route individual PIDs using the PID Remux tab Defining Service Remux Sessions NSG G supports RTSP (Real Time Streaming Protocol) sessions provisioned over RTSP protocol. NSG G supports up to 2000 NGOD sessions. You can route a service from any input to any output. You can select whether to: Output the service with its input ID or to remap it. Remap the service PIDs. NSG G supports RTSP provision with alternate sources. See 7.10 Configuring SDV s on page 192. When provisioning sessions through the web client or MCT, session ID starts at 10,000. To route a service 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the Service Remux tab. 3. Click Add. A blank row is added. 4. Define the parameters as explained below: Table 7-19: Service Remux Session NSG IP Session ID Multicast GbE Port No. IP Address Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Read only. A sequential number starting at 10000, to indicate the number of the session in the current page. Select multicast in case the input stream is a multicast TS. If selected, the IP address is removed from the IP Address box. Select the input GbE Port. Enter the required unicast/multicast IP address of the input port Harmonic Inc. 199 MCT Version x, Rev B

203 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring Broadcast s Table 7-19: Service Remux Session UDP Port Source IP Output QAM No. Service ID No PID Remap Enter the UDP port number. Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket Enter the QAM number, a number between 1-648, to output the session. Enter the required output service ID. You can output the service with the same input ID number or to remap the service. To output a service without remapping its PIDs, select No PID Remap. If you disable PID remapping, verify there is no PID conflict in the output Defining PID Remux Sessions You can route a PID from any input to any output. You can select whether to add a PMT reference to the PID. You can route an input PID to a few outputs and remap a PID to output it over different outputs. However, you cannot route a PID to the same output with different remapped PIDs. The PID 0x10 is reserved for the Network Information Table (NIT). If you remux a PID and remap it to PID 0x10, the PAT points to it as a NIT table PID. NSG G ignores any of the PID 0x10 configuration such as PMT reference and added descriptor. NOTE: You cannot remux PIDs of remuxed services. To configure a PID Remux Session 1. In Device Information, select the required device. NOTE: Expected Firmware Version should be and up. 2. In Details, select the PID Remux tab. 3. Click Add. A blank row is added. 4. Define the parameters as explained below: Table 7-20: PID Remux Session NSG IP Session ID Multicast GbE Port No. IP Address Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Read only. A sequential number starting at 1, to indicate the number of the session in the current page. Select multicast in case the input stream is a multicast TS. If selected, the IP address is removed from the IP Address box and a default multicast IP address appears. Select the input GbE Port. Enter the required unicast/multicast IP address of the input port Harmonic Inc. 200 MCT Version x, Rev B

204 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring M-CMTS s Table 7-20: PID Remux Session UDP Port Source IP Input PID (Hex) Output QAM No. Output PID (Hex) PMT Reference ES Type Descriptors Enter the UDP port number. Enter the IP address of the upstream device that streams the content to the defined GbE port and socket Enter the PID at the input. Open the list and select the required QAM-RF channel in the following format: X.Y.Z where: X module number (1 9) Y RF port number (1..2) Z channel number ( Annex B/17Annex A) Enter the required ID, in hexameter, of the ES at the output. You can output the PID with the same input ID or to remap the PID To allow PMT reference, select the PMT Ref box. PID 0x10 is excluded. It does not support PMT reference and added descriptor. Enter the ES Type to stream out the PID. This is the ES type that the PMT table points to. See, Standard ES Types and Descriptors on page 206. Enter the required descriptor as defined by the MPEG standard. See A.2 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (MPEG) on page Configuring M-CMTS s See 6.15 Configuring M-CMTS s on page Configuring NGOD s When the EdgeQAM is part of an NGOD system architecture, you need to configure the following to allow the QAM-RFs of the EdgeQAM to outflow SDV/VOD sessions: Configure and enable an NGOD ERM server as explained below. Define the NGOD ERM as the QAM-RF manager of the required QAM-RFs. See 7.8 Configuring TS Out s on page 187. To configure NGOD parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the NGOD tab. 3. Define the parameters as explained below Harmonic Inc. 201 MCT Version x, Rev B

205 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring CAS s NOTE: To allow communication with the ERM, the NSG 9000 device supports the D6 and R6 NGOD protocols. When communicating using the R6 protocol, NSG is always listening on port 554(RTSP). Table 7-21: NGOD s NSG G NSG IP Streaming Zone NGOD Component Name Bandwidth Update Threshold (kbps) Read only. Displays the IP address of ETH1. Enter the streaming zone as defined in the D6 protocol Enter the component name as defined in the D6 protocol Define the allowed deviation from the current output bit rate of the device. Whenever the bit rate deviation reaches the value defined in this field, the NSG sends the ERM the updated output bit rate. Routing Cost Enter a value as defined in the D6 protocol (0-255). Enable ERM (D6) ERM Address ERM IP Port ERM Version ERM Keep Alive Connection Retry Threshold Hold Time To enable the NSG 9000-ERM communication, select the Enable ERM (D6) box. Enter the ERM IP address. From NSG G version and up, you can also enter the name of the ERM. You can enter up to 100 characters. If you entered the ERM name, NSG G obtains the IP address of the required ERM from the DNS (Domain Name Server). See 7.3 Configuring Management Port on page 179. Enter the ERM TCP port number Select the supported version of the protocol. Version 2 is the default version. Read only. A period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between the keepalive messages transmitted by the NSG to the ERM. The default is 30 seconds. Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between retrials to connect to the ERM to send D6 messages Enter a period of time in seconds to indicate the duration between responses to successive Keep Alive and or UPDATE messages received by the NSG. If the duration time elapses and a response is not received, NSG tries to re-establish the connection with the ERM Configuring CAS s The Conditional Access System (CAS) prevents unauthorized viewing of programs by scrambling services that later on can be decrypted using the correct decrypting key. NSG G supports the following CAS systems: Privacy Mode - An encryption mode developed by Motorola Inc. DVB CAS - An encryption mode for the DVB protocol Harmonic Inc. 202 MCT Version x, Rev B

206 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring SNMP s To select CAS mode, see Selecting Encryption Mode on page 170. To configure DVB CAS, see Configuring DVB CAS on page 171. For Privacy Mode general overview, see Privacy Mode on page 103. To configure PM parameters, see Configuring PM s on page Configuring PM s 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the Privacy Mode tab. 3. Configure the parameters as explained below: Table 7-22: Privacy Mode s NSG IP Enable PM CAS Clear To Scramble Transition (sec) VODS ID Warning - ECM Expiration Date (days) Alarm - ECM Expiration Date (days) ERS Synch Number ECM Next Callback Date Last ECM Update Date Stream Processing on ECM Expiration The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG. Select to enable encryption. Clear To Scramble Transition (sec). The unique ID of the VODS the NSG belongs to. The NSG issues a warning if the number of days that have passed since the expiration of the current callback is larger than the value indicated in this field. The NSG issues an alarm if the number of days that have passed since the expiration of the current callback is larger than the value indicated in this field. View only. The current ERS Synch Number. When this number changes, a new ECM is generated. The next time the MCT application needs to check whether a new ECM was generated. The last time the NSG was updated with a new ECM or callback. Select either of the following: Scramble with Last ECM - All NSGs of the VODS should be updated with the new ECM. Don t Scramble - do not scramble the stream Configuring SNMP s The Simple Network Management Protocol allows network management systems to communicate with network elements. By default the SNMP is enabled and you may disable it when required Harmonic Inc. 203 MCT Version x, Rev B

207 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring SNMP s The SNMP table allows you to create the following: A list of SNMP managers to receive messages from network elements. Once you have accomplished that, configure the SNMP Community String. To set password like strings for the various network elements. The default string value for the Get community is public. By configuring the SNMP Community string you actually set up different SNMP managers to monitor specific groups of devices. To set SNMP parameters 1. In Device Information, select the required device. 2. In Details, select the SNMP tab. 3. Configure the parameters as explained below: Table 7-23: SNMP s NSG IP Address Enable Contact Location (SysLocation) Get Community Host 1 IP Address Host 1 Version Enable Host 1 Host 2 IP Address Host 2 Version Enable Host 2 Host 3 IP Address Host 3 Version Enable Host 3 Host 4 IP Address The IP address of the ETH1 port of the NSG. By default SNMP is enabled. Verify that it is enabled. To disable SNMP, de-select Enable SNMP. Enter contact information Enter the location of the device. In other words, the location of the host on which the SNMP agent, or server runs. The name of the community having Read access to the network elements. The elements will respond to this community Get commands. The default string is public. Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG. Open the Version list and select the required SNMP version. Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG. Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG. Open the Version list and select the required SNMP version. Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG. Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG. Open the Version list and select the required SNMP version. Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG. Enter the IP Address of the computer to which you wish to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG Harmonic Inc. 204 MCT Version x, Rev B

208 Chapter 7 Configuring NSG G Configuring SNMP s Table 7-23: SNMP s Host 4 Version Enable Host 4 Open the Version list and select the required SNMP version. Select to enable the computer to forward all SNMP traps from the NSG. NOTE: You can define up to four hosts Harmonic Inc. 205 MCT Version x, Rev B

209 A.1 Standard Elementary Stream (ES) Types Appendix A Standard ES Types and Descriptors The following standards are used to define types of elementary stream: Value 0x0 0x1 0x2 0x3 0x4 0x5 0x6 0x7 0x8 0x9 0xA 0xB 0xC 0xD 0xE 0xF-0x7F 0x80-0xFF ITU-T ISO/IEC Reserved ISO/ IEC Video Description ITU-T Rec. H.262 ISO/IEC Video or ISO/IEC constrained parameter video stream ISO/ IEC Audio ISO/IEC Audio ITU-T Rec. H ISO/IEC private_sections ITU-T Rec. H ISO/IEC PES packets containing private data ISO/IEC MHEG ITU-T Rec. H ISO/IEC Annex A DSM CC ITU-T Rec. H ISO/IEC type A ISO/IEC type B ISO/IEC type C ISO/IEC type D ISO/IEC auxiliary ITU-T Rec. H ISO/IEC Reserved User Private A.2 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (MPEG) The following MPEG standards are used to extend the definitions of elementary stream and programs: Value 0x2 0x3 0x4 Description Video stream descriptor audio stream descriptor hierarchy descriptor 2012 Harmonic Inc. 206 MCT Version x, Rev B

210 Appendix A Standard ES Types and Descriptors Standard ES and Program Descriptors (DVB) Value 0x5 0x6 0x7 0x8 0x9 0xA 0xB 0xC 0xD 0xF 0x10 0x12 Description registration descriptor data stream alignment descriptor target background grid descriptor video window descriptor CA descriptor ISO 639 descriptor system clock descriptor multiplex buffer utilization descriptor copyright descriptor private data indicator descriptor smoothing buffer descriptor IBP descriptor A.3 Standard ES and Program Descriptors (DVB) The following DVB standards are used to extend the definitions of elementary stream and programs: Value 0x51 0x52 0x56 0x59 0x5F 0x60 0x65 0x66 Description Mosaic descriptor Stream identifier descriptor Teletext descriptor Subtitling descriptor Private data specifier Service move descriptor CA system descriptor Data broadcast ID descriptor 2012 Harmonic Inc. 207 MCT, Version x, Rev B

211 Appendix B EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps The EIA (Electronic Industries Association) sets internationally recognized standards for standard frequencies (EIA STD) and for Harmonic related carriers (EIA HRC). Table 7-24: EIA-STD and EIA-HRC EIA Channel Number STD (Zero Offset) MHz HRC MHz Harmonic Inc. 208 MCT Version x, Rev B

212 Appendix B EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps Table 7-24: EIA-STD and EIA-HRC EIA Channel Number STD (Zero Offset) MHz HRC MHz Harmonic Inc. 209 MCT Version x, Rev B

213 Appendix B EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps Table 7-24: EIA-STD and EIA-HRC EIA Channel Number STD (Zero Offset) MHz HRC MHz Harmonic Inc. 210 MCT Version x, Rev B

214 Appendix B EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps Table 7-24: EIA-STD and EIA-HRC EIA Channel Number STD (Zero Offset) MHz HRC MHz Harmonic Inc. 211 MCT Version x, Rev B

215 Appendix B EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps Table 7-24: EIA-STD and EIA-HRC EIA Channel Number STD (Zero Offset) MHz HRC MHz Harmonic Inc. 212 MCT Version x, Rev B

216 Appendix B EIA-STD and EIA-HRC Channel Maps Table 7-24: EIA-STD and EIA-HRC EIA Channel Number STD (Zero Offset) MHz HRC MHz Harmonic Inc. 213 MCT Version x, Rev B

217 Harmonic Inc. 549 Baltic Way Sunnyvale, CA 94089, U.S.A. T F Copyright 2007 Harmonic Inc. All rights reserved. Manual Part No XXXX

NSG Universal EdgeQAM Software User s Guide VERSION 1.6 NSG Rev B

NSG Universal EdgeQAM Software User s Guide VERSION 1.6 NSG Rev B NSG 9000 Universal EdgeQAM Software User s Guide VERSION 1.6 NSG 9000 Rev B Disclaimer Harmonic reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior

More information

ProMedia TM Xpress. High-Performance Transcoder. Installation Guide RELEASE Rev A Manual Part No. MAN-PMX-IG

ProMedia TM Xpress. High-Performance Transcoder. Installation Guide RELEASE Rev A Manual Part No. MAN-PMX-IG ProMedia TM Xpress High-Performance Transcoder Installation Guide RELEASE 1.0.0.0 Rev A Manual Part No. MAN-PMX-IG-1.0.0.0 Disclaimer Harmonic reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and

More information

NETWORK PRINT MONITOR User Guide

NETWORK PRINT MONITOR User Guide NETWORK PRINT MONITOR User Guide Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change for improvement without notice. We

More information

KMnet Viewer. User Guide

KMnet Viewer. User Guide KMnet Viewer User Guide Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change for improvement without notice. We cannot be

More information

Legal Notes. Regarding Trademarks KYOCERA MITA Corporation

Legal Notes. Regarding Trademarks KYOCERA MITA Corporation Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change without notice. We cannot be held liable for any problems arising from

More information

Quick Start Guide. ARIS Architect. Version 9.8 Service Release 2

Quick Start Guide. ARIS Architect. Version 9.8 Service Release 2 ARIS Architect Version 9.8 Service Release 2 October 2015 This document applies to ARIS Version 9.8 and to all subsequent releases. Specifications contained herein are subject to change and these changes

More information

KYOCERA Net Admin User Guide

KYOCERA Net Admin User Guide KYOCERA Net Admin User Guide Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change without notice. We cannot be held liable

More information

BBI Quick Guide. Nortel 10Gb Uplink Ethernet Switch Module for IBM BladeCenter Version 1.0. Part Number: 31R1727, June 2006

BBI Quick Guide. Nortel 10Gb Uplink Ethernet Switch Module for IBM BladeCenter Version 1.0. Part Number: 31R1727, June 2006 TM Alteon OS BBI Quick Guide Nortel 10Gb Uplink Ethernet Switch Module for IBM BladeCenter Version 1.0 Part Number: 31R1727, June 2006 2350 Mission College Blvd. Suite 600 Santa Clara, CA 95054 www.bladenetwork.net

More information

Legal Notes. Regarding Trademarks KYOCERA MITA Corporation

Legal Notes. Regarding Trademarks KYOCERA MITA Corporation Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change without notice. We cannot be held liable for any problems arising from

More information

SAP BusinessObjects Live Office User Guide SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform 4.1 Support Package 2

SAP BusinessObjects Live Office User Guide SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform 4.1 Support Package 2 SAP BusinessObjects Live Office User Guide SAP BusinessObjects Business Intelligence platform 4.1 Support Package 2 Copyright 2013 SAP AG or an SAP affiliate company. All rights reserved. No part of this

More information

IBM NetBAY Virtual Console Software. Installer and User Guide

IBM NetBAY Virtual Console Software. Installer and User Guide IBM NetBAY Virtual Console Software Installer and User Guide INSTRUCTIONS This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the

More information

User s Manual. Version 5

User s Manual. Version 5 User s Manual Version 5 Copyright 2017 Safeway. All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language,

More information

Dell License Manager Version 1.2 User s Guide

Dell License Manager Version 1.2 User s Guide Dell License Manager Version 1.2 User s Guide Notes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. CAUTION: A CAUTION indicates either

More information

IBM NetBAY Virtual Console Software. Installer and User Guide

IBM NetBAY Virtual Console Software. Installer and User Guide IBM NetBAY Virtual Console Software Installer and User Guide INSTRUCTIONS This symbol is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the

More information

Enterprise Vault.cloud CloudLink Google Account Synchronization Guide. CloudLink to 4.0.3

Enterprise Vault.cloud CloudLink Google Account Synchronization Guide. CloudLink to 4.0.3 Enterprise Vault.cloud CloudLink Google Account Synchronization Guide CloudLink 4.0.1 to 4.0.3 Enterprise Vault.cloud: CloudLink Google Account Synchronization Guide Last updated: 2018-06-08. Legal Notice

More information

StoneGate Management Center. Release Notes for Version 5.1.4

StoneGate Management Center. Release Notes for Version 5.1.4 StoneGate Management Center Release Notes for Version 5.1.4 Created: August 20, 2010 Table of Contents What s New... 3 Enhancements... 3 Fixes... 3 Major Changes Introduced in Version 5.1... 4 System Requirements...

More information

Installation Guide. EventTracker Enterprise. Install Guide Centre Park Drive Publication Date: Aug 03, U.S. Toll Free:

Installation Guide. EventTracker Enterprise. Install Guide Centre Park Drive Publication Date: Aug 03, U.S. Toll Free: EventTracker Enterprise Install Guide 8815 Centre Park Drive Publication Date: Aug 03, 2010 Columbia MD 21045 U.S. Toll Free: 877.333.1433 Abstract The purpose of this document is to help users install

More information

ARIS Architect QUICK START GUIDE. Version Service Release 7

ARIS Architect QUICK START GUIDE. Version Service Release 7 ARIS Architect QUICK START GUIDE Version 9.8 - Service Release 7 December 2016 This document applies to ARIS Version 9.8 and to all subsequent releases. Specifications contained herein are subject to change

More information

LiteSpeed for SQL Server 6.1. Configure Log Shipping

LiteSpeed for SQL Server 6.1. Configure Log Shipping LiteSpeed for SQL Server 6.1 Configure Log Shipping 2010 Quest Software, Inc. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. This guide contains proprietary information protected by copyright. The software described in this guide

More information

SonicWall Secure Mobile Access SMA 500v Virtual Appliance 8.6. Getting Started Guide

SonicWall Secure Mobile Access SMA 500v Virtual Appliance 8.6. Getting Started Guide SonicWall Secure Mobile Access SMA 500v Virtual Appliance 8.6 Getting Started Guide Copyright 2017 SonicWall Inc. All rights reserved. SonicWall is a trademark or registered trademark of SonicWall Inc.

More information

Desktop & Laptop Edition

Desktop & Laptop Edition Desktop & Laptop Edition USER MANUAL For Mac OS X Copyright Notice & Proprietary Information Redstor Limited, 2016. All rights reserved. Trademarks - Mac, Leopard, Snow Leopard, Lion and Mountain Lion

More information

OpenForms360 Validation User Guide Notable Solutions Inc.

OpenForms360 Validation User Guide Notable Solutions Inc. OpenForms360 Validation User Guide 2011 Notable Solutions Inc. 1 T A B L E O F C O N T EN T S Introduction...5 What is OpenForms360 Validation?... 5 Using OpenForms360 Validation... 5 Features at a glance...

More information

Quick Start Guide. ARIS Architect. Version 9.7

Quick Start Guide. ARIS Architect. Version 9.7 ARIS Architect Version 9.7 October 2014 This document applies to ARIS Version 9.7 and to all subsequent releases. Specifications contained herein are subject to change and these changes will be reported

More information

KYOCERA Net Admin Installation Guide

KYOCERA Net Admin Installation Guide KYOCERA Net Admin Guide Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change without notice. We cannot be held liable for

More information

Computer Management* (IEA) Training Foils

Computer Management* (IEA) Training Foils Intel-powered classmate PC Computer Management* (IEA) Training Foils Version 1.0 Legal Information INFORMATION IN THIS DOCUMENT IS PROVIDED IN CONNECTION WITH INTEL PRODUCTS. NO LICENSE, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,

More information

Parallels Remote Application Server

Parallels Remote Application Server Parallels Remote Application Server Parallels Client for Mac User's Guide v16 Parallels International GmbH Vordergasse 59 8200 Schaffhausen Switzerland Tel: + 41 52 672 20 30 www.parallels.com Copyright

More information

Configuration Manager

Configuration Manager CHAPTER 7 This chapter describes how to perform routine Cisco VXC Manager configuration management tasks using the Administrator Console. It provides information on managing the configuration settings

More information

Getting Started with Prime Network

Getting Started with Prime Network CHAPTER 1 These topics provide some basic steps for getting started with Prime Network, such as how to set up the system and the basic parts of the Prime Network Administration GUI client. Basic Steps

More information

Epson Device Admin User s Guide NPD EN

Epson Device Admin User s Guide NPD EN Epson Device Admin User s Guide NPD5817-00 EN About this Manual About this Manual Marks and Symbols! Caution: Instructions that must be followed carefully to avoid bodily injury. c Important: Instructions

More information

Enforced Client Policy & Reporting Server (EPRS) 2.3. Administration Guide

Enforced Client Policy & Reporting Server (EPRS) 2.3. Administration Guide Enforced Client Policy & Reporting Server (EPRS) 2.3 Copyright 2016 Dell Inc. All rights reserved. This product is protected by U.S. and international copyright and intellectual property laws. Dell, the

More information

version 7.6 user manual

version 7.6 user manual version 7.6 user manual 2 Copyright JAVS 1981-2014 Table of Contents Introduction... 4 Getting Started... 5 Login... 5 JAVS Publisher 7 Overview... 6 Search Tool Overview... 7 Search Tool-Detailed Operation...

More information

Concord Print2Fax. Complete User Guide. Table of Contents. Version 3.0. Concord Technologies

Concord Print2Fax. Complete User Guide. Table of Contents. Version 3.0. Concord Technologies Concord Print2Fax Complete User Guide Table of Contents Version 3.0 Concord Technologies 2018 1 Concord Technologies concordfax.com premiumsupport@concordfax.com Copyright 2017 CONCORD Technologies. All

More information

CompleteView Admin Console User Manual. CompleteView Version 4.6

CompleteView Admin Console User Manual. CompleteView Version 4.6 CompleteView Admin Console User Manual CompleteView Version 4.6 Table of Contents Introduction... 1 End User License Agreement...1 Overview...2 Configuration... 3 Starting the Admin Console...3 Adding

More information

MagicInfo VideoWall Author

MagicInfo VideoWall Author MagicInfo VideoWall Author MagicInfo VideoWall Author User Guide MagicInfo VideoWall Author is a program designed to construct a VideoWall layout and create VideoWall content by adding various elements

More information

MultiSite Suite: Accounts Payable

MultiSite Suite: Accounts Payable MultiSite Suite: Accounts Payable User s Manual version 6 Copyright & Trademarks Copyright Notice and Trademarks 2010 MultiSite Systems, All rights reserved. Microsoft, Windows, Excel, and Outlook are

More information

Software User's Guide

Software User's Guide Software User's Guide The contents of this guide and the specifications of this product are subject to change without notice. Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications

More information

Object Transfer Utility (OTU) Guide Release 7.5

Object Transfer Utility (OTU) Guide Release 7.5 [1]Oracle DIVArchive Object Transfer Utility (OTU) Guide Release 7.5 E79773-01 November 2016 Oracle DIVArchive Object Transfer Utility (OTU) Guide, Release 7.5 E79773-01 Copyright 2016, Oracle and/or its

More information

SC-T35/SC-T45/SC-T46/SC-T47 ViewSonic Device Manager User Guide

SC-T35/SC-T45/SC-T46/SC-T47 ViewSonic Device Manager User Guide SC-T35/SC-T45/SC-T46/SC-T47 ViewSonic Device Manager User Guide Copyright and Trademark Statements 2014 ViewSonic Computer Corp. All rights reserved. This document contains proprietary information that

More information

Practice Labs User Guide

Practice Labs User Guide Practice Labs User Guide This page is intentionally blank Contents Introduction... 3 Overview... 3 Accessing Practice Labs... 3 The Practice Labs Interface... 4 Minimum Browser Requirements... 5 The Content

More information

Excel Select a template category in the Office.com Templates section. 5. Click the Download button.

Excel Select a template category in the Office.com Templates section. 5. Click the Download button. Microsoft QUICK Excel 2010 Source Getting Started The Excel Window u v w z Creating a New Blank Workbook 2. Select New in the left pane. 3. Select the Blank workbook template in the Available Templates

More information

KYOCERA Net Viewer 5.3 User Guide

KYOCERA Net Viewer 5.3 User Guide KYOCERA Net Viewer. User Guide Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change without notice. We cannot be held liable

More information

9936A LogWare III. User s Guide. Revision

9936A LogWare III. User s Guide. Revision 9936A LogWare III User s Guide Revision 850701 Table of Contents 1 Introduction...1 1.1 Symbols Used... 1 1.2 Conventions... 1 1.3 What is LogWare?... 1 1.4 License Agreement... 2 1.5 Requirements...

More information

User s Guide. Intermec Printer Network Manager v1.1

User s Guide. Intermec Printer Network Manager v1.1 User s Guide Intermec Printer Network Manager v1.1 Information in this manual is subject to change without prior notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of Intermec Printer AB. Copyright

More information

9936A LogWare III. User s Guide. Revision

9936A LogWare III. User s Guide. Revision 9936A LogWare III User s Guide Revision 680301 Table of Contents 1 Introduction... 1 1.1 Symbols Used...1 1.2 Conventions...1 1.3 What is LogWare?...1 1.4 License Agreement...2 1.5 Requirements...2 1.6

More information

Using the Prime Performance Manager Web Interface

Using the Prime Performance Manager Web Interface 3 CHAPTER Using the Prime Performance Manager Web Interface The following topics provide information about using the Cisco Prime Performance Manager web interface: Accessing the Prime Performance Manager

More information

Software User's Guide

Software User's Guide Software User's Guide The contents of this guide and the specifications of this product are subject to change without notice. Brother reserves the right to make changes without notice in the specifications

More information

Getting Started With the Cisco PAM Desktop Software

Getting Started With the Cisco PAM Desktop Software CHAPTER 3 Getting Started With the Cisco PAM Desktop Software This chapter describes how to install the Cisco PAM desktop client software, log on to Cisco PAM, and begin configuring access control features

More information

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide

KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide KYOCERA Net Viewer User Guide Legal Notes Unauthorized reproduction of all or part of this guide is prohibited. The information in this guide is subject to change without notice. We cannot be held liable

More information

OPERATION MANUAL. MV-410HS Layout Editor. Version higher. Command

OPERATION MANUAL. MV-410HS Layout Editor. Version higher. Command OPERATION MANUAL MV-410HS Layout Editor Version 3.0 - higher Command Command Table of Contents 1. Setup... 1 1-1. Overview... 1 1-2. System Requirements... 1 1-3. Operation Flow... 1 1-4. Installing MV-410HS

More information

HP JetAdvantage Security Manager. User Guide

HP JetAdvantage Security Manager. User Guide HP JetAdvantage Security Manager User Guide Copyright 2017 HP Development Company, L.P. Reproduction, adaptation, or translation without prior written permission is prohibited, except as allowed under

More information

FortiRecorder Central User Guide VERSION 1.3

FortiRecorder Central User Guide VERSION 1.3 FortiRecorder Central User Guide VERSION 1.3 FORTINET DOCUMENT LIBRARY http://docs.fortinet.com FORTINET VIDEO GUIDE http://video.fortinet.com FORTINET BLOG https://blog.fortinet.com CUSTOMER SERVICE &

More information

Creating Domain Templates Using the Domain Template Builder 11g Release 1 (10.3.6)

Creating Domain Templates Using the Domain Template Builder 11g Release 1 (10.3.6) [1]Oracle Fusion Middleware Creating Domain Templates Using the Domain Template Builder 11g Release 1 (10.3.6) E14139-06 April 2015 This document describes how to use the Domain Template Builder to create

More information

Using Sitecore 5.3.1

Using Sitecore 5.3.1 Using Sitecore 5.3.1 An End-User s Guide to Using and Administrating Sitecore Author: Sitecore Corporation Date: December 12, 2007 Release: Rev. 1.0 Language: English Sitecore is a registered trademark.

More information

Cisco TEO Adapter Guide for Microsoft System Center Operations Manager 2007

Cisco TEO Adapter Guide for Microsoft System Center Operations Manager 2007 Cisco TEO Adapter Guide for Microsoft System Center Operations Manager 2007 Release 2.3 April 2012 Americas Headquarters Cisco Systems, Inc. 170 West Tasman Drive San Jose, CA 95134-1706 USA http://www.cisco.com

More information

NiceForm User Guide. English Edition. Rev Euro Plus d.o.o. & Niceware International LLC All rights reserved.

NiceForm User Guide. English Edition. Rev Euro Plus d.o.o. & Niceware International LLC All rights reserved. www.nicelabel.com, info@nicelabel.com English Edition Rev-0910 2009 Euro Plus d.o.o. & Niceware International LLC All rights reserved. www.nicelabel.com Head Office Euro Plus d.o.o. Ulica Lojzeta Hrovata

More information

User Manual Portable Laptop Console Crash Cart Adapter

User Manual Portable Laptop Console Crash Cart Adapter User Manual Portable Laptop Console Crash Cart Adapter GUC211V PART NO. M1458 www.iogear.com 2017 IOGEAR. All Rights Reserved. Part No. M1458. IOGEAR, the IOGEAR logo is trademarks of IOGEAR. Microsoft

More information

Veritas System Recovery 18 Management Solution Administrator's Guide

Veritas System Recovery 18 Management Solution Administrator's Guide Veritas System Recovery 18 Management Solution Administrator's Guide Documentation version: 18 Legal Notice Copyright 2018 Veritas Technologies LLC. All rights reserved. Veritas and the Veritas Logo are

More information

Installing the Operating System or Hypervisor

Installing the Operating System or Hypervisor If you purchased E-Series Server or NCE Option 1 (E-Series Server or NCE without a preinstalled operating system or hypervisor), you must install an operating system or hypervisor. This chapter includes

More information

Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners.

Oracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation and/or its affiliates. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. Primavera Portfolio Management 9.0 What s New Copyright 1999-2011, Oracle and/or its affiliates. The Programs (which include both the software and documentation) contain proprietary information; they are

More information

Security Explorer 9.1. User Guide

Security Explorer 9.1. User Guide Security Explorer 9.1 User Guide Security Explorer 9.1 User Guide Explorer 8 Installation Guide ii 2013 by Quest Software All rights reserved. This guide contains proprietary information protected by copyright.

More information

User Guide For Universal Devices Administrative Console (ISY)

User Guide For Universal Devices Administrative Console (ISY) User Guide For Universal Devices Administrative Console (ISY) - 1 - Table of Contents 1. PURPOSE 6 2. THEORY OF OPERATION 6 3. INSTALLATION 7 4. CONFIGURATION 8 4.1 Prerequisites 8 4.1.1 Host Computer

More information

Smart Access Control System Software. User Manual. Version 1.0

Smart Access Control System Software. User Manual. Version 1.0 Smart Access Control System Software User Manual Version 1.0 Copyright MaCaPS International Ltd. 2002 This manual was produced by MaCaPS International Ltd. MaCaPS International Ltd. http://www.macaps.com.hk

More information

Legacy Client Chart (LCC) Installation Guide for Purkinje System

Legacy Client Chart (LCC) Installation Guide for Purkinje System Legacy Client Chart (LCC) Installation Guide for Purkinje System A Guide to Run and Configure the Legacy Client Chart (LCC) Solution For questions about using this guide please contact IMS@aohc.org Table

More information

Actual product may vary from photo

Actual product may vary from photo Actual product may vary from photo Trademarks, Copyrights, and Patents The following sections outline legal information for StarTech.com products and also for third-party companies, products, and technologies

More information

T-Invoicer User Guide

T-Invoicer User Guide - 1 - T-Invoicer User Guide Introduction T-Invoicer is an entry level invoicing system designed for small & startup business's who need to invoice customers quickly & easily. T-Invoicer has all the basic

More information

Agent and Agent Browser. Updated Friday, January 26, Autotask Corporation

Agent and Agent Browser. Updated Friday, January 26, Autotask Corporation Agent and Agent Browser Updated Friday, January 26, 2018 2018 Autotask Corporation Table of Contents Table of Contents 2 The AEM Agent and Agent Browser 3 AEM Agent 5 Privacy Mode 9 Agent Browser 11 Agent

More information

Vol. 1 Introduction. OMS-100 User Manual. Publishing version: V2.2. Publishing version: V2.2 1

Vol. 1 Introduction. OMS-100 User Manual. Publishing version: V2.2. Publishing version: V2.2 1 Vol. 1 Introduction OMS-100 User Manual Publishing version: V2.2 Publishing version: V2.2 1 OMS-100 User Manual Table of Contents I Vol. 1 Introduction 5 2 1 Foreword... 5 1.1 Typographical Conventions...

More information

Unit III: Working with Windows and Applications. Chapters 5, 7, & 8

Unit III: Working with Windows and Applications. Chapters 5, 7, & 8 Unit III: Working with Windows and Applications Chapters 5, 7, & 8 Learning Objectives In this unit, you will: Launch programs and navigate the Windows task bar. Perform common windows functions. Customize

More information

Managing the CaseMap Admin Console User Guide

Managing the CaseMap Admin Console User Guide Managing the CaseMap Admin Console User Guide CaseMap Server, Version 2.3 Accessing the CaseMap Admin Console Registering CaseMap Servers Registering SQL Servers Setting Up Roles and Users Managing SQL

More information

User Guide. Illustra Connect Version C0

User Guide. Illustra Connect Version C0 User Guide Illustra Connect Version.0 8200-114-01 C0 Notice The information in this manual was current when published. The manufacturer reserves the right to revise and improve its products. All specifications

More information

x10data Application Platform v7.1 Installation Guide

x10data Application Platform v7.1 Installation Guide Copyright Copyright 2010 Automated Data Capture (ADC) Technologies, Incorporated. All rights reserved. Complying with all applicable copyright laws is the responsibility of the user. Without limiting the

More information

Veritas Desktop Agent for Mac Getting Started Guide

Veritas Desktop Agent for Mac Getting Started Guide Veritas Desktop Agent for Mac Getting Started Guide The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. Documentation

More information

User Guide. Avigilon Camera Configuration Tool

User Guide. Avigilon Camera Configuration Tool User Guide Avigilon Camera Configuration Tool 2016, Avigilon Corporation. All rights reserved. AVIGILON, the AVIGILON logo and AVIGILON CONTROL CENTER are trademarks of Avigilon Corporation. Other product

More information

AMC Manager User's Manual

AMC Manager User's Manual WA102520XA AMC Manager User's Manual Copyright 2016 silex technology, Inc. All rights reserved. Index 1. Introduction...1 1-1. Introduction...1 Disclaimers...1 Trademarks...1 2. What is AMC Manager?...3

More information

Microsoft Access 2010

Microsoft Access 2010 Microsoft Access 2010 Chapter 2 Querying a Database Objectives Create queries using Design view Include fields in the design grid Use text and numeric data in criteria Save a query and use the saved query

More information

PROMISE ARRAY MANAGEMENT ( PAM) FOR FastTrak S150 TX2plus, S150 TX4 and TX4000. User Manual. Version 1.3

PROMISE ARRAY MANAGEMENT ( PAM) FOR FastTrak S150 TX2plus, S150 TX4 and TX4000. User Manual. Version 1.3 PROMISE ARRAY MANAGEMENT ( PAM) FOR FastTrak S150 TX2plus, S150 TX4 and TX4000 User Manual Version 1.3 Promise Array Management Copyright 2003 Promise Technology, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Copyright by

More information

Agilent ChemStation. ECM Interface Guide. Agilent Technologies

Agilent ChemStation. ECM Interface Guide. Agilent Technologies Agilent ChemStation ECM Interface Guide Agilent Technologies Notices Agilent Technologies, Inc. 2004, 2005-2007 No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form or by any means (including electronic

More information

Version /20/2012. User Manual. AP Manager II Lite Business Class Networking

Version /20/2012. User Manual. AP Manager II Lite Business Class Networking Version 1.0 12/20/2012 User Manual AP Manager II Lite Business Class Networking Table of Contents Table of Contents Product Overview... 1 Minimum System Requirements... 2 Access Point Requirements... 2

More information

Operating Instructions

Operating Instructions Operating Instructions Software (Network Configuration and ) For Digital Imaging Systems Opening Configuration/ System Requirements General Description Before using this software, please carefully read

More information

Word 2016 Advanced. North American Edition SAMPLE

Word 2016 Advanced. North American Edition SAMPLE Word 2016 Advanced Word 2016 Advanced North American Edition WORD 2016 ADVANCED Page 2 2015 Cheltenham Group Pty. Ltd. All trademarks acknowledged. E&OE. No part of this document may be copied without

More information

Colligo Engage Outlook App 7.1. Offline Mode - User Guide

Colligo Engage Outlook App 7.1. Offline Mode - User Guide Colligo Engage Outlook App 7.1 Offline Mode - User Guide Contents Colligo Engage Outlook App 1 Benefits 1 Key Features 1 Platforms Supported 1 Installing and Activating Colligo Engage Outlook App 3 Checking

More information

Veritas System Recovery 16 Management Solution Administrator's Guide

Veritas System Recovery 16 Management Solution Administrator's Guide Veritas System Recovery 16 Management Solution Administrator's Guide Documentation version: 2017 Legal Notice Copyright 2017 Veritas Technologies LLC. All rights reserved. Veritas and the Veritas Logo

More information

Creating a Website with Publisher 2016

Creating a Website with Publisher 2016 Creating a Website with Publisher 2016 Getting Started University Information Technology Services Learning Technologies, Training & Audiovisual Outreach Copyright 2017 KSU Division of University Information

More information

Sage Estimating (SQL) v17.13

Sage Estimating (SQL) v17.13 Sage Estimating (SQL) v17.13 Sage 100 Contractor (SQL) Integration Guide December 2017 This is a publication of Sage Software, Inc. 2017 The Sage Group plc or its licensors. All rights reserved. Sage,

More information

Microsoft Access 2013

Microsoft Access 2013 Microsoft Access 2013 Chapter 2 Querying a Database Objectives Create queries using Design view Include fields in the design grid Use text and numeric data in criteria Save a query and use the saved query

More information

Microsoft Access 2013

Microsoft Access 2013 Microsoft Access 2013 Chapter 2 Querying a Database Objectives Create queries using Design view Include fields in the design grid Use text and numeric data in criteria Save a query and use the saved query

More information

Horizon Launcher Configuration Guide

Horizon Launcher Configuration Guide Horizon Launcher Configuration Guide Windows NT and Windows 2000 are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. All other product or company names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their

More information

Primavera Portfolio Management 9.1 Bridge for Microsoft Office Project Server 2007 Users Guide

Primavera Portfolio Management 9.1 Bridge for Microsoft Office Project Server 2007 Users Guide Primavera Portfolio Management 9.1 Bridge for Microsoft Office Project Server 2007 Users Guide Last printed: 7/28/2011 11:37:00 PM Last saved: 7/28/2011 11:37:00 PM ii Primavera Portfolio Management Bridge

More information

LiNC-NXG for Windows 8 Professional, Windows 7 Professional, Vista Business Edition and XP Professional

LiNC-NXG for Windows 8 Professional, Windows 7 Professional, Vista Business Edition and XP Professional LiNC-NXG for Windows 8 Professional, Windows 7 Professional, Vista Business Edition and XP Professional Installation Guide for LiNC-NXG 33-10067-001 REV: C PCSC 3541 Challenger Street Torrance, CA 90503

More information

FreeWave Technologies Tool Suite Version 2.6.0

FreeWave Technologies Tool Suite Version 2.6.0 FreeWave Technologies Tool Suite Version 2.6.0 FreeWave Technologies, Inc. 1880 South Flatiron Court Boulder, CO 80301 (303) 444-3862 (303) 786-9948 Fax www.freewave.com Table of Contents FreeWave Tool

More information

Dell Repository Manager Business Client Version 2.0 User s Guide

Dell Repository Manager Business Client Version 2.0 User s Guide Dell Repository Manager Business Client Version 2.0 User s Guide Notes, Cautions, and Warnings NOTE: A NOTE indicates important information that helps you make better use of your computer. CAUTION: A CAUTION

More information

Laser Beam Printer. Network Guide. IMPORTANT: Read this manual carefully before using your printer. Save this manual for future reference.

Laser Beam Printer. Network Guide. IMPORTANT: Read this manual carefully before using your printer. Save this manual for future reference. Laser Beam Printer Network Guide IMPORTANT: Read this manual carefully before using your printer. Save this manual for future reference. ENG Network Guide How This Manual Is Organized Chapter 1 Before

More information

BCM 4.0 Personal Call Manager User Guide. BCM 4.0 Business Communications Manager

BCM 4.0 Personal Call Manager User Guide. BCM 4.0 Business Communications Manager BCM 4.0 Personal Call Manager User Guide BCM 4.0 Business Communications Manager Document Status: Beta Document Version: 02 Part Code: N0027256 Date: January 2006 Copyright Nortel Networks Limited 2006

More information

For additional information, please consult the Read-Me and Help documentation or contact Electro-Voice or Dynacord technical support.

For additional information, please consult the Read-Me and Help documentation or contact Electro-Voice or Dynacord technical support. Quick Start Guide Hello, and welcome to IRIS-Net software. We want you to get the most from your IRIS-Net projects and encourage you to explore the additional Read-Me and Help documentation provided with

More information

Programming Manual KX-TVA50 KX-TVA200. Voice Processing System. Model

Programming Manual KX-TVA50 KX-TVA200. Voice Processing System. Model Voice Processing System Programming Manual Model KX-TVA50 KX-TVA200 Thank you for purchasing a Panasonic Voice Processing System. Please read this manual carefully before using this product and save this

More information

User Guide. Web Intelligence Rich Client. Business Objects 4.1

User Guide. Web Intelligence Rich Client. Business Objects 4.1 User Guide Web Intelligence Rich Client Business Objects 4.1 2 P a g e Web Intelligence 4.1 User Guide Web Intelligence 4.1 User Guide Contents Getting Started in Web Intelligence 4.1... 5 Log into EDDIE...

More information

BASIC NAVIGATION & VIEWS...

BASIC NAVIGATION & VIEWS... Content Overview VISUAL TOUR... 5 NEW FEATURES IN OUTLOOK 2010... 6 BASIC NAVIGATION & VIEWS... 7 SETTING PREFERENCES... 7 Creating an Outlook Shortcut... 7 Choosing a Startup View... 7 CUSTOMIZING INBOX

More information

Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface Quick Guide. Layer 2-7 GbE Switch Module for IBM BladeCenter. Part Number: A, August 2003

Alteon OS Browser-Based Interface Quick Guide. Layer 2-7 GbE Switch Module for IBM BladeCenter. Part Number: A, August 2003 Browser-Based Interface Quick Guide Alteon OS 20.0 Part Number: TM Layer 2-7 GbE Switch Module for IBM BladeCenter 4655 Great America Parkway Santa Clara, CA 95054 www.nortelnetworks.com Copyright 2003

More information

Quick KVM 1.1. User s Guide. ClearCube Technology, Inc.

Quick KVM 1.1. User s Guide. ClearCube Technology, Inc. Quick KVM 1.1 User s Guide ClearCube Technology, Inc. Copyright 2005, ClearCube Technology, Inc. All rights reserved. Under copyright laws, this publication may not be reproduced or transmitted in any

More information

SIMATIC Automation License Manager Manual 02/2008 A5E

SIMATIC Automation License Manager Manual 02/2008 A5E s Contents SIMATIC Automation License Manager Product Overview 1 Installation 2 Working with the Automation License Manager 3 Glossar Index Manual 02/2008 A5E02128430-01 Safety Guidelines This manual contains

More information